VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Order Number EK-624EA-MG-001 This manual is intended for Digital customer service engineers. It covers the (xyp) and (xrp) CPU options, the (xma2) memory, the (xrv) vector option, and the (xbi_plus) I/O adapter. This man- ual is to be used with the VAX 6000 Platform Service Manual. digital equipment corporation maynard, massachusetts ------------------------------------------------------------ First Printing, December 1990 ------------------------------------------------------------ The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. The software, if any, described in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license. No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software or equipment that is not supplied by Digital Equipment Corporation or its affiliated companies. ------------------------------------------------------------ Copyright ©1990 by Digital Equipment Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Printed in U.S.A. ------------------------------------------------------------ The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation: DEMNA PDP VAXcluster DEC ULTRIX VAXELN DEC LANcontroller UNIBUS VMS DECnet VAX XMI DECUS VAXBI dt FCC NOTICE: The equipment described in this manual generates, uses, and may emit radio frequency energy. The equipment has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such radio frequency interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference, in which case the user at his own expense may be required to take measures to correct the interference. ------------------------------------------------------------ Contents ------------------------------------------------------------ Preface xiii ------------------------------------------------------------ Chapter 1 Introduction ------------------------------------------------------------ 1.1 Why Read This Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1.2 System Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 1.3 Identifying the Platform Remotely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 1.4 Troubleshooting Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Chapter 2 Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ 2.1 Diagnostic Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 2.2 Self-Test and Additional Power-Up Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 2.3 ROM-Based Diagnostic Monitor and Its Control . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 2.3.1 ROM-Based Diagnostic Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 2.3.2 START Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 2.3.3 START Command Qualifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 2.3.4 RBD Test Printout, Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 2.3.5 RBD Test Printout, Failing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 2.3.6 SUMMARY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 2.3.7 Sample RBD Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 2.3.8 Running ROM-Based Diagnostics on VAXBI Devices . . . . . 2-28 2.4 VAX Diagnostic Supervisor Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 2.4.1 Booting the Diagnostic Supervisor from a CD Server . . . . 2-32 2.4.2 Running VAX/DS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 2.4.3 Sample VAX/DS Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 2.4.4 VAX/DS Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 iii Chapter 3 (xyp) Scalar Processor ------------------------------------------------------------ 3.1 KA62B Physical Description and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 3.2 (xyp) Configuration Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 3.3 KA62B Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 3.4 Boot Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 3.5 Power-Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 3.6 (xyp) Self-Test Results: Console Display . . . 3-16 3.7 (xyp) Self-Test Results: Module LEDs . . . . . 3-18 3.8 ROM-Based Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 3.8.1 (xyp) Self-Test -- RBD 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 3.8.2 CPU/Memory Test -- RBD 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 3.8.3 Second-Level Cache Test -- RBD 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 3.9 VAX/DS Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 3.10 Machine Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 3.11 Console Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 3.12 CPU Replacement in Single CPU Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 3.12.1 Using the RESTORE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 3.12.2 Using SET Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 3.13 CPU Replacement in Multiple CPU Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 3.14 How to Add a New Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48 3.15 Patching the EEPROM with EVUCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50 3.16 (XYP) Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54 Chapter 4 (XRP) Scalar Processor ------------------------------------------------------------ 4.1 (XRP) Physical Description and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 4.2 (XRP) Configuration Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 4.3 KA64A Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 4.4 Boot Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 4.5 Power-Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 4.6 (XRP) Self-Test Results: Console Display . . . 4-18 4.7 (XRP) Self-Test Results: Module LEDs . . . . 4-20 4.8 (XRP) Self-Test Results: XGPR Register . . . 4-24 4.9 ROM-Based Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 4.10 (XRP) ROM-Based Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 iv 4.10.1 Self-Test -- RBD 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 4.10.2 CPU/Memory Interaction Tests -- RBD 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 4.11 VAX/DS Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 4.12 Machine Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 4.13 Console Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 4.14 (XRP) Handling Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 4.15 CPU Replacement in Single CPU Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 4.15.1 Using the RESTORE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 4.15.2 Using SET Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48 4.16 CPU Replacement in Multiple CPU Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50 4.17 How to Add a New Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54 4.18 Patching the EEPROM with EVUCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56 4.19 (XRP) Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60 Chapter 5 (XRV) Vector Processor ------------------------------------------------------------ 5.1 (xrv) Physical Description and Specifications 5-2 5.2 KA64A/FV64A Coprocessors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 5.3 (xrv) Configuration Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 5.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 5.5 Self-Test Results: Console Display and Self-Test LED . . . . . . 5-10 5.6 Self-Test Results: Scalar XGPR Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 5.7 Vector Processor Tests -- RBD 0 and RBD 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 5.8 VAX/DS Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 5.9 Machine Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 5.10 Vector Console Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 5.11 (xrv) Handling Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 5.12 How to Replace a Vector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 5.13 Vector Processor Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Chapter 6 MS65A Memory ------------------------------------------------------------ 6.1 MS65A Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 6.2 MS65A Configuration Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 6.3 MS65A Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 6.4 MS65A Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 v 6.5 System Interleaving Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 6.6 MS65A Interleaving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 6.7 Console Commands for Interleaving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 6.8 MS65A Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 6.9 Memory Self-Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 6.10 Memory Self-Test Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 6.11 Memory RBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 6.12 Memory RBD Test Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 6.13 MS65A Control and Status Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 6.14 Mixing MS65A and MS62A Memory Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26 Chapter 7 DWMBB I/O Adapter ------------------------------------------------------------ 7.1 DWMBB Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 7.1.1 Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 7.1.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 7.2 (xbi_plus) Configuration Rules . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 7.3 DWMBB Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 7.4 (xbi_plus) Tests -- RBD 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 7.5 DWMBB Tests -- RBD 2 Subtests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 7.6 (xbi_plus) Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Appendix A Console Error Messages for Model 300 ------------------------------------------------------------ Appendix B Console Error Messages for Model 400 ------------------------------------------------------------ Appendix C EEPROM Mismatches and the UPDATE Command ------------------------------------------------------------ vi Appendix D Control Flags for Booting ------------------------------------------------------------ Glossary ------------------------------------------------------------ Index ------------------------------------------------------------ Examples ------------------------------------------------------------ 2-1 Sample Self-Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 2-2 START Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 2-3 RBD Test Printout, Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 2-4 RBD Test Printout, Failing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 2-5 SUMMARY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 2-6 Sample RBD Session, Part 1 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 2-7 Sample RBD Session, Part 2 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 2-8 VAXBI RBD Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 2-9 Booting the Diagnostic Supervisor over the Ethernet . . . . . . 2-32 2-10 Running Standalone VAX/DS from a TK70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 2-11 Running VAX/DS in User Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 2-12 Sample VAX/DS Session, Part 1 of 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 2-13 Sample VAX/DS Session, Part 2 of 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 2-14 Sample VAX/DS Session (Model 400 Only), Part 3 of 3 . . . . . 2-40 3-1 ROM and EEPROM Version Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 3-2 Self-Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 3-3 (xyp) Self-Test RBD 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 3-4 CPU/memory Test RBD 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 3-5 Second-Level Cache Test RBD 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 3-6 Running Standalone Processor Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 3-7 Replacing a Single Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 3-8 Replacing a Single Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 3-9 Retrieving EEPROM Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 3-10 Customizing an EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 3-11 Adding a Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48 3-12 Patching the EEPROM with EVUCA -- Part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50 vii 3-13 Patching the EEPROM with EVUCA -- Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52 4-1 ROM and EEPROM Version Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 4-2 Self-Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 4-3 XGPR Register After Power-Up Test Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 4-4 Self-Test -- RBD 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 4-5 Running (XRP) Self-Test (RBD 0) on a Secondary Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 4-6 CPU/Memory Interaction Tests -- RBD 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 4-7 VAX/DS Commands for Running Standalone Processor Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 4-8 Replacing a Single Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 4-9 Replacing a Single Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48 4-10 Retrieving EEPROM Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50 4-11 Customizing an EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52 4-12 Adding a Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54 4-13 Patching the EEPROM with EVUCA -- Part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56 4-14 Patching the EEPROM with EVUCA -- Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58 5-1 Self-Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 5-2 XGPR Register After Power-Up Test Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 5-3 Running RBD 0 on a Secondary Processor with an Attached Vector Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 5-4 VAX/DS Commands for Testing Vector Processors . . . . . . . . . 5-16 6-1 SET MEMORY and INITIALIZE Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 6-2 MS65A Memory Module Results in Self-Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 6-3 MS65A Memory Module Node Exclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 6-4 RBD 3 -- Test on All Modules with Halt on Error . . . . . . . . . 6-22 6-5 RBD 3 -- Test with Confirm Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 6-6 RBD 3 -- Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 7-1 (xbi_plus) Tests -- RBD 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 viii Figures ------------------------------------------------------------ 1-1 (2X) System Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 1-2 Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 1-3 Booting the Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 2-1 Diagnostics Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 3-1 (XYP) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 3-2 Typical (xyp) Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 3-3 (xyp) Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 3-4 Selection of Boot Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 3-5 (xyp) Power-Up Sequence, Part 1 of 2 . . . . . 3-12 3-6 (XYP) Power-Up Sequence, Part 2 of 2 . . . . . 3-14 3-7 (xyp) LEDs After Power-Up Self-Test . . . . . . 3-19 3-8 The Stack in Response to a Machine Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 4-1 (XRP) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 4-2 Typical (XRP) Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 4-3 (XRP) Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 4-4 Selection of Boot Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 4-5 (XRP) Power-Up Sequence, Part 1 of 2 . . . . . 4-13 4-6 (XRP) Power-Up Sequence, Part 2 of 2 . . . . . 4-16 4-7 (XRP) LEDs After Power-Up Self-Test . . . . . 4-20 4-8 The Stack in Response to a Machine Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 4-9 Holding the (XRP) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 4-10 Inserting the (XRP) Module in an XMI Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 5-1 (XRV) Module (Side 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 5-2 (XRV) Module (Side 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5-3 VAX 6000 Model 400 Vector Processing System . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 5-4 Scalar/Vector Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 5-5 (XRV) Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 5-6 XGPR Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 5-7 The Stack in Response to a Machine Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 5-8 Holding the (xrv) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 5-9 Inserting the (xrv) Module in an XMI Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 5-10 Replacing a Vector Module in an XMI Card Cage . . . . . . . . . 5-26 6-1 MS65A Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 ix 6-2 MS65A Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 6-3 MS65A Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 6-4 Examples of Interleaving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 6-5 Memory Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 7-1 (XBIA_TITLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 7-2 (XBIB_TITLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 7-3 VAX 6000 Slot Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 7-4 (XBI_TITLE) Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Tables ------------------------------------------------------------ 1 Associated Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi 1-1 VAX 6000 Platform Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 2-1 Self-Test Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 2-2 RBD Monitor Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 2-3 RBD Monitor Control Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 2-4 ROM-Based Diagnostic Programs for KA62B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 2-5 ROM-Based Diagnostic Programs for KA64A . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 2-6 START Command Qualifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 2-7 VAX Diagnostic Program Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 2-8 VAX/DS Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 2-9 VAX Diagnostic Supervisor Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 3-1 KA62B Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 3-2 KA62B Error LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 3-3 KA62B ROM-Based Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 3-4 (xyp) Power-Up Test -- RBD 0 . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 3-5 Extended CPU/Memory Test -- RBD 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 3-6 Second-Level Cache Test -- RBD4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 3-7 (xyp) VAX/DS Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 3-8 Machine Check Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 3-9 Console Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 3-10 (xyp) Internal Processor Registers . . . . . . . . 3-54 3-11 (XMI) Registers for the the (xyp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57 3-12 (xyp) Registers in (XMI) Private Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58 4-1 (XRP) Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 x 4-2 (XRP) Error LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 4-3 XMI Base Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 4-4 Interpreting XGPR Failing Test Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 4-5 ROM-Based Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 4-6 (XRP) Self-Test -- RBD 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 4-7 CPU/Memory Interaction Tests -- RBD 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 4-8 (XRP) VAX/DS Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 4-9 Machine Check Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 4-10 Console Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 4-11 (XRP) Internal Processor Registers . . . . . . . 4-60 4-12 (XMI) Registers for the (XRP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64 4-13 (XRP) Registers in (XMI) Private Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 5-1 (XRV) Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 5-2 Processor Module Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 5-3 Interpreting XGPR Failing Test Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 5-4 Vector Processor Tests in Self-Test -- RBD 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 5-5 Vector Tests in CPU/Memory Interaction Tests -- RBD 1 . . . 5-15 5-6 (XRV) VAX/DS Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 5-7 (xrv) Machine Check Parameters . . . . . . . . . 5-17 5-8 Vector Console Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 5-9 (XRV) Internal Processor Registers . . . . . . . 5-28 6-1 (xma2_title) Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 6-2 VAX 6000 Interleaving Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 6-3 Memory Tests -- RBD 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 6-4 RBD 3 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 6-5 (xma2) Control and Status Registers . . . . . . 6-24 6-6 Memory Module Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26 7-1 DWMBB/A Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 7-2 DWMBB/B Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 7-3 (xbi_plus) Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 7-4 (xbi_plus) Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 7-5 (xbi_plus_title) RBD Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 7-6 VAXBI Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 7-7 (xbi_plus) XMI Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 xi A-1 Model 300 Console Error Messages Indicating Halt . . . . . . . . A-1 A-2 Model 300 Standard Console Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3 B-1 Model 400 Console Error Messages Indicating Halt . . . . . . . . B-1 B-2 Model 400 Standard Console Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 C-1 UPDATE Results on EEPROM Mismatches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 D-1 R5 Bit Functions for VMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1 D-2 R5 Bit Functions for ULTRIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2 xii Preface ------------------------------------------------------------ The VAX 6000 Family The first product in this midrange multiprocessing VAX family is the (calypso). Second, the (hyperion) offered higher performance, with a faster processor and a more efficient console tape drive (TK70). The third CPU in the series is (rigel), which uses advanced technology for more enhanced performance. All models have two versions -- a traditional multiuser timesharing system and a VAXserver for diskless computers and workstations. The VAX 6000 Model 500 introduces a new XMI backplane and power subsystem. While the older versions of the VAX 6000 series relied on a VAXBI and its options for I/O, the newer versions have several I/O adapters that provide I/O directly from the XMI. This manual covers the (xyp) and (xrp) CPUs in the newer cabinet. Please make sure you have the correct manuals for the systems you are servicing. Intended Audience This manual is written for Digital customer service engineers servicing the (2x) systems in the VAX 6000 series platform. The manual covers the second and third of the three CPUs in this series. The KA62A will not be shipped in the new (XMI2) being introduced with the VAX 6000 Model 500. Document Structure This manual uses a structured documentation design. There are many topics, organized into small sections for efficient reference. Each topic begins with an abstract. You can quickly gain a comprehensive overview by reading only the abstracts. Next is an illustration or example, which also provides quick reference. Last in the structure is descriptive text. xiii This manual has seven chapters and five appendixes: · Chapter 1, Introduction, states why this manual is being written. It also describes how to tell what power and packaging variant you have from the console. · Chapter 2, Diagnostics, describes self-test, general methods for running ROM-based diagnostics, and diagnostics run under the VAX Diagnostic Supervisor. Refer to specific chapters for information on running diagnostics on CPUs, memory, and options. · Chapter 3, (xyp) Scalar Processor, describes the (hyperion) processor giving module specifications, configuration rules, functional descriptions, and register descriptions. Diagnostics and module replacement are also discussed. · Chapter 4, (xrp) Scalar Processor, describes the (rigel) processor giving module specifications, configuration rules, functional descriptions, and register descriptions. Diagnostics and module replacement are also discussed. · Chapter 5, (xrv) Vector Processor, describes the vector processor option available with the (rigel) system. Diagnostics and module replacement are also discussed. · Chapter 6, (XMA2) Memory, gives module specifications, configuration rules, register descriptions, and functional descriptions of this memory module. Diagnostics, module replacement, interleaving, and memory addressing are also discussed. · Chapter 7, (xbi_plus) I/O Adapter, describes the I/O adapter to the VAXBI option available on either the (hyperion) or the (rigel) systems. · Appendix A lists the (hyperion) console error messages. · Appendix B lists the (rigel) console error messages. · Appendix C describes the results of executing the UPDATE command when different ROM revisions are in a system. · Appendix D describes the boot flags used when booting either the VMS or ULTRIX operating systems. xiv VAX 6000 Series Documents These documents apply to all VAX 6000 systems. ------------------------------------------------------------ Title Order Number ------------------------------------------------------------ VAX 6000 Series Installation Guide EK-600EA-IN VAX 6000 Series Owner 's Manual EK-600EA-OM VAX 6000 Platform Service Manual EK-600EA-MG VAX 6000 Series Platform Technical User 's Guide EK-600EA-TM ------------------------------------------------------------ VAX 6000 Models 200 and 300 Documents These documents should be used for systems shipped before the VAX 6000 Model 500. The VAX 6200/6300 documentation set includes the following: ------------------------------------------------------------ Title: VAX 6200 Order Number ------------------------------------------------------------ Options and Maintenance EK-620AB-MG System Technical User 's Guide EK-620AA-TM ------------------------------------------------------------ (RIGEL) Documents These documents should be used for systems shipped before the VAX 6000 Model 500. Documents in the VAX 6000-400 documentation set include: ------------------------------------------------------------ Title Order Number ------------------------------------------------------------ VAX 6000-400 System Technical User 's Guide EK-640EB-TM VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance EK-640EB-MG VAX 6000-400 Maintenance Advisory EK-640EA-MA VAX 6000 Series Upgrade Manual EK-600EB-UP VAX 6000 Series Vector Processor Owner 's Manual EK-60VAA-OM VAX 6000 Series Vector Processor Programmer 's Guide EK-60VAA-PG ------------------------------------------------------------ xv Associated Documents Other documents that you may find useful include: Table 1: Associated Documents ------------------------------------------------------------ Title Order Number ------------------------------------------------------------ System Hardware Options ------------------------------------------------------------ VAXBI Expander Cabinet Installation Guide EK-VBIEA-IN VAXBI Options Handbook EB-32255-46 ------------------------------------------------------------ System I/O Options ------------------------------------------------------------ CIBCA User Guide EK-CIBCA-UG CIXCD Interface User Guide EK-CIXCD-UG DEBNI Installation Guide EK-DEBNI-IN DEClancontroller 400 Installation Guide EK-DEMNA-IN InfoServer 100 Installation and Owner 's Guide EK-DIS1K-IN KDB50 Disk Controller User 's Guide EK-KDB50-UG KDM70 Disk Controller User 's Guide EK-KDM70-UG KFMSA Module Installation and User Manual EK-KFMSA-IM RRD40 Disc Drive Owner 's Manual EK-RRD40-OM RA90/RA92 Disk Drive User Guide EK-ORA90-UG SA70 Enclosure User Guide EK-SA70E-UG ------------------------------------------------------------ Operating System Manuals ------------------------------------------------------------ Guide to Maintaining a VMS System AA-LA34A-TE Guide to Setting Up a VMS System AA-LA25A-TE Introduction to VMS System Management AA-LA24A-TE ULTRIX-32 Guide to System Exercisers AA-KS95B-TE xvi Table 1 (Cont.): Associated Documents ------------------------------------------------------------ Title Order Number ------------------------------------------------------------ Operating System Manuals ------------------------------------------------------------ VMS Installation and Operations: VAX 6000 Series AA-LB36B-TE VMS Networking Manual AA-LA48A-TE VMS System Manager 's Manual AA-LA00A-TE VMS VAXcluster Manual AA-LA27A-TE ------------------------------------------------------------ Peripherals ------------------------------------------------------------ HSC Installation Manual EK-HSCMN-IN H4000 DIGITAL Ethernet Transceiver Installation Manual EK-H4000-IN Installing and Using the VT320 Video Terminal EK-VT320-UG RV20 Optical Disk Owner 's Manual EK-ORV20-OM SC008 Star Coupler User 's Guide EK-SC008-UG TA78 Magnetic Tape Drive User 's Guide EK-OTA78-UG TA90 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Owner 's Manual EK-OTA90-OM TK70 Streaming Tape Drive Owner 's Manual EK-OTK70-OM TU81/TA81 and TU/81 PLUS Subsystem User 's Guide EK-TUA81-UG ------------------------------------------------------------ VAX Manuals ------------------------------------------------------------ VAX Architecture Reference Manual EY-3459E-DP VAX Systems Hardware Handbook -- VAXBI Systems EB-31692-46 VAX Vector Processing Handbook EC-H0739-46 ------------------------------------------------------------ xvii Chapter 1 Introduction ------------------------------------------------------------ With the introduction of the VAX 6000 Model 500 several changes were made to improve the platform in which the various VAX 6000 models reside. This chapter discusses the changes between the XMI-1 and XMI-2 platforms. Sections include: · Why Read This Document · System Functional Description · Identifying the Platform Remotely · Troubleshooting Flowcharts Introduction 1-1 1.1 Why Read This Document The VAX 6000 series platform has changed to accommodate features of the VAX 6000 Model 500. Several XMI I/O adapters are also now available and can be installed in any XMI card cage. A new power regulator, capable of providing enough current at +3.3 volts for the VAX Model 500, is inhibited in the H9657 cabinet for Models 300 and 400. A more powerful battery backup unit (BBU) option, capable of providing power to the entire backplane, is available. Table 1-1: VAX 6000 Platform Differences ------------------------------------------------------------ Item XMI-1 Platform XMI-2 Platform ------------------------------------------------------------ XMI backplane XMI-1 XMI-2 Cabinet number 70-24900-XX H9657-XX XMI I/O adapters DWMBA CIXCD, DEMNA, KDM70, DWMBB VAXBI Required DWMBA adapter Two 6-slot channels Optional 1 DWMBB adapter One 12-slot channel Load device TK50 or TK70 Optional 1 XTC 20-29176-01 20-29176-02 Power regulators +5V - H7214 +5VBB - H7214 -5, -2, 12 - H7215 +5V - H7214 +5VBB - None 2 -5, -2, 12 - H7215 +3.3V - H7242 Power logic H7206-A H7206-B Battery backup H7231-N H7236-A 2 Inhibit cable None 17-02522-01 ------------------------------------------------------------ 1 Either a VAXBI with a TK70 or a CD server is required as a system load de- vice. 2 In the XMI-2 backplane +5V and what was +5VBB are tied together. Since the VAX 6000 Model 500 uses a writeback cache design, the CPU's cache also needed bat- tery backup and the need for a separate +5VBB to back up only memory disap- peared. The H7236-A BBU delivers more power than the H7231-N BBU. ------------------------------------------------------------ 1-2 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 1-1 shows the major differences between the two platforms. Although this manual does not cover the differences in detail, it does cover the (2x) systems, the (xma2), and the DWMBB in the XMI-2 cabinet. Other documentation covers upgrades (see preface). Power is distributed differently in the XMI-1 and XMI-2 backplanes. Therefore, power considerations are important when servicing these systems. Care must be exercised when replacing broken modules because of incompatibilities. The H7242 power regulator provides +3.3 volts to the XMI-2 backplane to operate the VAX 6000 Model 500. The +3.3 volts is inhibited by a cable if either a (xyp) or a (XRP) is in the system. All XMI adapters have been designed to work on both backplanes with the exception of the DWMBA. A new XMI-to-VAXBI adapter, the DWMBB, is used to communicate between the two buses. There are several ways to tell which cabinet houses your (rigel) or (hyperion). Four are described here. · Look at the cabinet number on the label on the bottom of the vertical frame member at the left rear of the cabinet. If this label is hidden from view by an SA70, you will have to use another method. If the label indicates a 70 class part number, you have the XMI-1 platform. If the label indicates an H9657, you have the XMI-2 platform. · Open the rear cabinet door and look at the middle power regulator. If the regulator is an H7242, it is an XMI-2 platform. Otherwise, it is an XMI-1 platform. · Open the rear cabinet door and look to see if the H7242 inhibit cable is installed. This cable has a large yellow tag on it and is easy to see at a glance. · Open the rear cabinet door and look at the H7206 power logic unit just above the H405 AC controller. If there are two connectors on the H7206, the platform is an XMI-2. Otherwise, it is an XMI-1 platform. For information on the XMI-1 power and packaging, see the VAX 6000-400 Options and Maintenance manual or the VAX 6200/6300 VAXserver 6200/ 6300 Options and Maintenance manual. For information on the XMI-2 power and packaging, see the VAX 6000 Platform Service Manual. Introduction 1-3 1.2 System Functional Description The (2X) systems support multiprocessing with up to six (xyp) or (XRP) pro- cessors. The system uses a high-speed (XMI) system bus to connect its processors, its memory modules, and its I/O adapters. Figure 1-1: (2X) System Architecture The (XMI) is the 64-bit system bus connecting all major subsystems. It has a maximum throughput of 100 Mbytes per second. Early versions of the VAX 6000 series had no direct XMI I/O. I/O was achieved through an interface between the XMI bus and the VAXBI bus which had direct I/O to the CI, disks, tapes, and other I/O devices. Since direct XMI I/O now exists, the VAXBI is now optional. The VAXBI and (XMI) share the concept of a node. A node is a single functional unit that consists of one or more modules. The 1-4 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual (XMI) has three types of nodes: processor nodes, memory nodes, and I/O adapter nodes. A processor node, consists of a single-board VAX processor. It contains a central processor unit (CPU) chip, a floating-point processor, a primary and secondary cache, a writable EEPROM for system parameters, and a communication path to the XMI bus. The (XRP) has a chip that communicates with an optional vector processor. Processors communicate with main memory over the (XMI). The system supports multiprocessing with up to six processors. One pro- cessor becomes the boot processor during power-up and handles all system communication. The other processors become secondary processors and re- ceive system information from the primary processor (see Section 3.4 and Section 4.4). The (rigel) has an optional vector processor, the (xrv), which executes VAX vector instructions. This processor is tightly coupled to the (XRP) through a Vector Interface Bus (VIB) cable connecting the two modules. They occupy adjacent (XMI) slots. A memory node is an (XMA2). In (2x) MS62A may also be installed. See Section 6.14, Mixing MS65A and MS62A Memory Modules for details. Memory is a global resource and may be reached by all processors on the (XMI). There are three variants of the (xma2); 32-Mbyte, 64-Mbyte, and 128- Mbyte. Each memory module has ECC and control logic. The console program automatically interleaves the memory for maximum performance. An optional battery backup unit protects all data in case of power failure. The XMI I/O adapters include the DEMNA, the CIXCD, and the KDM70. The DEMNA is an Ethernet adapter, the CIXCD is a CI adapter, and the KDM70 is a disk adapter. An optional (XMI)-to-VAXBI adapter, called a (XBI_plus), is a 2-module adapter that maps data between these two buses. I/O adapters on the VAXBI pass data between the system and peripheral devices. The (XBIA_plus) module is in- stalled on the (XMI) bus; it communicates with the (XBIB_plus) module on the VAXBI using a 120-pin cable. The in-cabinet version of the VAXBI in the XMI-2 platform has 12 slots. Each VAXBI channel must have one (xbi_plus) connecting it to the (XMI). System error messages and self-test results refer to the pair of DWMBB modules as XBI. Introduction 1-5 1.3 Identifying the Platform Remotely Section 1.1 explained how to identify the platform by inspection. However, persons diagnosing systems remotely will want to be able to identify system power. While there is no foolproof method to do this on these systems, the method given below should work in almost all cases. Examples of Power Identification Using Show Configuration 1. >>> SHOW CONFIGURATION !Likely an XMI-1 system Type Rev 1+ KA64A (8082) 0007 3+ KA64A (8082) 0007 A+ MS62A (4001) 0002 B+ MS62A (4001) 0002 D+ DWMBA/A (2001) 0002! E+ DWMBA/A (2001) 0002! XBI D 1+ DWMBA/B (2107) 0007 2+ CIBCA (0108) 41C1 5+ DMB32 (0109) 210B 6+ DEBNI (0118) 0100 XBI E 1+ DWMBA/B (2107) 0007 4+ KDB50 (010E) 0F1C 6+ TBK70 (410B) 0307 2. >>> SHOW CONFIGURATION !Likely an XMI-2 system Type Rev 4+ KA64A (8082) 0000 8+ MS65A (4001) 0084 9+ MS65A (4001) 0084 A+ CIXCD (0C05) 1611 B+ DEMNA (0C03) 0600 E+ DWMBB/A (2002) 0001" XBI E 1+ DWMBB/B (210F) 000A 4+ KDB50 (010E) 131C 6+ KLESI-B (0103) 0006 8+ TBK70 (410B) 0307# 1-6 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual 3. >>> SHOW CONFIGURATION !Likely an XMI-2 system Type Rev 1+ (XRP) (8082) 0007 2+ (XRP) (8082) 0007 8+ MS65A (4001) 0084 9+ MS65A (4001) 0084 B+ KDM70 (0C22) 1811 D+ CIXCD (0C05) 1611 E+ DEMNA (0C03) 0600 System configuration provides clues to help identify the power and packaging of (hyperion) and (rigel) systems. The examples show output from a SHOW CONFIGURATION command on three systems. System 1. The first system is an XMI-1 based system because there are two DWMBAs at nodes D and E (see ! in the example). A DWMBA is not allowed on an XMI-2 based system. Therefore, the proper power and related FRUs are found in the second column of Table 1-1. There are also no XMI I/O devices, which is an indication of the XMI-1. The system also has MS62A memory modules. XMI-2 based systems ship with MS65A memories. System 2. The second system is an XMI-2 based system because the XMI- to-VAXBI adapter is a DWMBB at node E. A DWMBB is not likely to be found in an XMI-1 based system. Note also that the VAXBI has node numbers above six, indicating a 12-slot VAXBI channel. Therefore, the proper power and related FRUs are found in the third column of Table 1-1. System 3. The third system is an XMI-2 based system. There is no VAXBI, the memories are all MS65As, and there is no system load device shown. Therefore, the proper power and related FRUs are found in the third column of Table 1-1. Introduction 1-7 1.4 Troubleshooting Flowcharts These flowcharts reference sections in this manual. Figure 1-2: Power-Up 1-8 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Introduction 1-9 Figure 1-3: Booting the Operating System 1-10 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Chapter 2 Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ This chapter describes diagnostics for the VAX 6000 Model 300 and 400 systems. Sections include: · Diagnostic Overview · Self-Test and Additional Power-Up Tests · ROM-Based Diagnostic Monitor and Its Control ROM-Based Diagnostic Programs START Command START Command Qualifiers RBD Test Printout, Passing RBD Test Printout, Failing SUMMARY Command Sample RBD Session Running ROM-Based Diagnostics on VAXBI Devices · VAX Diagnostic Supervisor Programs Booting the Diagnostic Supervisor from a CD Server Running VAX/DS Sample VAX/DS Session VAX/DS Diagnostics Diagnostics 2-1 2.1 Diagnostic Overview The (6000) systems are tested with two types of diagnostics: ROM-based and loadable. The ROM-based diagnostics (RBD) include self-tests, additional power-up tests, and callable diagnostics (from the RBD monitor). The loadable diagnostics run under the VAX Diagnostic Supervisor (VAX/DS) in standalone mode or in user mode (see Figure 2-1). Figure 2-1: Diagnostics Design 2-2 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Self-Tests Each module on the (XMI) and VAXBI buses has its own self-test resident in ROM, except for the now optional (xbi_ plus) modules. At power-up, initialization, booting, or system reset, each module runs its own self-test. The processor self-test completes within 10 seconds. The memory test completes in less than 60 seconds. Results of self-test are printed on the STF line of the console self-test display. Other Power-Up Tests Following the modules' self-tests, two additional tests are run and reported in the self-test display: CPU/memory interaction tests and (xbi_plus) tests. All CPUs that have passed self-test run the CPU/memory interaction test. The CPU/memory interaction test checks that the processors can access memory. Memory also has a self-test that tests actual memory locations. The CPU/memory interaction test is the second test for memory and serves as a check on the memory's (XMI) interface and on some CPU logic that can be tested only by accessing memory. Results are printed on the ETF line of the self-test display. The optional DWMBB modules are tested by the boot processor before it queries the VAXBI options for the results of their self-tests. Results from both are printed on the XBI lines on the self-test printout (see Example 2-1). Operator-Invoked ROM-Based Diagnostics From the console prompt, you can enter RBD mode and run ROM- based diagnostics. There are five diagnostics for the (xyp) and four for the (XRP). Common tests include self-tests, CPU/memory interaction tests, DWMBB tests, and memory tests; the (xyp) has an additional secondary cache test, and the (XRP) has an additional vector interaction test. In RBD mode, you have the capability of running tests other than those in the default suite, running multiple passes of tests, and receiving an error report with information about any failing tests. VAX Diagnostic Supervisor (VAX/DS) From the console prompt, you can boot VAX/DS in standalone mode from the TK tape, a CD server, or other media and run level 3 diagnostics. From the operating system, you can run VAX/DS in user mode and run level 2R diagnostics. Level 2 VAX/DS diagnostics may be run either in standalone or user mode. See Table 2-9 for a listing of VAX/DS diagnostics. Diagnostics 2-3 2.2 Self-Test and Additional Power-Up Tests The self-test diagnostics reside in ROM on the processors and on most modules. These diagnostics check each module at power-up, when the system is reset, and during a boot. Self-test results are written to the console terminal, as shown in Example 2-1. Example 2-1: Sample Self-Test Results #123456789 0123456789 0123456789 01234567# ! Trace for KA64A in slot 1 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NODE # A A . . M M M M P P P P P P TYP o + . . + + + + + + + + + + STF ! . . . . . . . . E E E E E B BPD . . . . . . . . + + + + + + ETF " . . . . . . . . E E E E E B BPD . . . . . . . . . + + . + . + . XBI E +# . . . . A4 A3 A2 A1 . . . . . . ILV . . . . 64 64 64 64 . . . . . . 256Mb ROM0 = V3.00 ROM1 = V3.00 EEPROM = 2.03/3.00 SN = SG01234567 $ >>> The callouts in Example 2-1 refer to Table 2-1. 2-4 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Self-test is invoked and results are written to the console under several circumstances: · At power-up · When the control panel Restart button is pressed · During a boot · When the console command INITIALIZE is issued On a (rigel) the first line of the self-test printout is the progress trace. This line indicates how the (XRP) at node 1 is functioning during self-test. If there is no processor in node 1, no trace appears. The remainder of the printout is the self-test display. Table 2-1 describes the tests run during self-test. The callouts in Table 2-1 refer to Example 2-1. Table 2-1: Self-Test Components ------------------------------------------------------------ Test Description ------------------------------------------------------------ Processors Each processor runs its own self-test resident in its own ROM. A plus sign (+) on the STF line ! means the processor passed. Each processor also tests in- teraction with memory. A plus sign on the ETF line " means the test passed. Memory Each memory runs its own on-board self-test. A plus sign on the STF line ! means the memory passed. (XBI_ PLUS) The (XMI)-to-VAXBI adapter is tested by the boot proces- sor. A plus sign at the right of the XBI line # means both the DWMBB/ A and DWMBB/B modules passed. VAXBI Each VAXBI bus on the system is checked, and each VAXBI node runs its own self-test. A plus sign in column 0 through F of the XBI line # means the VAXBI node passed. ------------------------------------------------------------ The self-test printout in Example 2-1 reflects a specific configuration. A detailed explanation of self-test results is available by typing HELP SELF at the console prompt, or see the VAX 6000 Series Owner 's Manual. The tests run during self-test can be individually invoked in RBD mode using the ROM-based diagnostics monitor program. Here you can examine each test more closely and determine which test is failing. Two different ROM revision lines are possible. Example 2-1 shows the KA64A revision line (see $). The KA62B revision line follows: Diagnostics 2-5 ROM = 6.0 EEPROM = 2.0/6.0 SN = SG01234567 2-6 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual 2.3 ROM-Based Diagnostic Monitor and Its Control The ROM-Based Diagnostic Monitor program is accessed through the console program. Type T/R at the console prompt to enter RBD mode. RBD mode has three commands with qualifiers and a set of control characters that assist the user when entering commands or running tests. Table 2-2: RBD Monitor Commands ------------------------------------------------------------ Command Function ------------------------------------------------------------ ST[ART]n Starts RBD n, where n is the number of the RBD pro- gram listed in Table 2-4 and Table 2-5 SU[MMARY] Prints a summary report of the last RBD program run QU[IT] Exits the RBD monitor and returns control to the console pro- gram ------------------------------------------------------------ Table 2-3: RBD Monitor Control Characters ------------------------------------------------------------ Character Environment Function ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ CTRL/C ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ Test running Stops the execution of an RBD test, executes cleanup code, and returns to the RBDn> prompt. ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ DELETE ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ RBD command line Use for deleting erroneous characters entered on the command line. ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ CTRL/Q ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ Test running Resumes output to terminal that was suspended with ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ CTRL/S ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ . ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ CTRL/R ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ At RBD prompt Refreshes the command line; useful when charac- ters are deleted. ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ CTRL/S ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ Test running Suspends output to the terminal until ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ CTRL/Q ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ is typed. ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ CTRL/U ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ At RBD prompt Disregards previous input. ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ CTRL/Y ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ Test running Stops the execution of an RBD test and does not exe- cute any cleanup code. ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ CTRL/Z ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ At RBD prompt Exits RBD monitor program and enters con- sole program; same effect as the QUIT com- mand. ------------------------------------------------------------ 2-8 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual To enter the RBD monitor, at the console prompt type: >>> T/R ! This is the abbreviation for TEST/RBD. ! Early versions of the console only accept T/R. RBDn> ! RBD prompt appears signifying entrance into ! RBD mode, where n is the XMI node number of ! the processor running the RBD monitor program. The RBD commands are explained here and in Sections 2.3.2 and 2.3.6. Table 2-2 gives the commands, their abbreviations, and functions. Four programs run from the ROM-based diagnostics (RBD) monitor program. The programs are CPU self-test, CPU/memory interaction tests, the DWMBB tests, and memory RBD tests. Each of these programs has several tests, as shown in Table 2-4 and Table 2-5. A fifth program is available for the (hyperion) and tests it's secondary cache. The RBDs are designed for use by Digital customer service personnel. The RBD monitor responds to several control characters. These characters manage both the diagnostic and the monitor as shown in Table 2-3. When CTRL/C is entered from the console terminal, the diagnostic stops execution, runs cleanup code, and returns control to the RBD monitor program. This happens immediately when running RBD 0, RBD 1, or RBD 2; there may be a wait of up to one minute for a response when RBD 3 is running. If CTRL/C is typed at the RBD monitor prompt, it has the same effect as CTRL/U. When you use the DELETE key (or rubout key), characters being deleted are preceded by a backslash ( \ ) and print as they are rubbed out. When the next valid character is typed, it is preceded by a backslash ( \ ) to delineate the deleted characters. You can use CTRL/R to refresh the line. When the RBD monitor program receives a CTRL/U, the program disregards all previous input typed and returns the RBD prompt. If a test is running when CTRL/U is entered, CTRL/U is ignored. When a CTRL/Y is received by the RBD monitor program from the console, the diagnostic stops execution and returns control to the RBD monitor program. No cleanup code is run, and the unit under test is left in an indeterminate state. A CTRL/Y entered at the RBD monitor prompt has the same effect as CTRL/U. When the RBD monitor program receives a CTRL/Z, the program exits and control is returned to the console program (>>>). CTRL/Z has the same effect as the QUIT command. If CTRL/Z is entered while an RBD test is running, CTRL/Z has the same effect as CTRL/C: it halts the test and executes cleanup code. Diagnostics 2-9 2.3.1 ROM-Based Diagnostic Programs Table 2-4 and Table 2-5 lists the diagnostic programs available for both VAX 6000 Model 300 and Model 400 systems. Table 2-4: ROM-Based Diagnostic Programs for KA62B ------------------------------------------------------------ RBD Program Test Totals Default (Power-Up) Default (Callable) Description ------------------------------------------------------------ 0 34 34 34 Runs CPU tests 1 20 20 20 Runs CPU/memory interaction tests 2 26 21 20 Runs DWMBB tests 3 12 0 7 Sizes and runs additional tests on main memory 4 8 0 0 Miscellaneous tests of second-level cache ------------------------------------------------------------ Table 2-5: ROM-Based Diagnostic Programs for KA64A ------------------------------------------------------------ RBD Program Test Totals Default (Power-Up) Default (Callable) Description ------------------------------------------------------------ 0 37 49 37 49 37 49 Runs CPU tests Runs scalar and vector tests 1 13 17 12 16 13 17 Runs CPU/memory interaction tests Runs scalar/vector CPU/memory in- teraction tests 2 26 20 20 Runs DWMBB tests 3 12 0 7 Sizes and runs additional tests on main memory ------------------------------------------------------------ 2-10 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 2-4 and Table 2-5 show the number of tests available. Column 1 contains the numbers used to invoke the test in RBD mode. RBD2> ST1 !Starts the CPU memory interaction test The second column gives the total number of tests in the RBD. The third column indicates that there may be some tests not run during power up, and the fourth column indicates the number of test run when the RBD is invoked by the START command with no qualifiers. All tests may be run. Some, like a number of the memory diagnostics, modify data or take a long time and are not run by default. These tests require the operator to invoke them specifically. For the (xyp) each RBD has a default number of tests that run when the test is invoked. The CPU and CPU/memory tests (RBD 0 and 1) run all their tests when invoked. RBD 4, the secondary cache tests, are not run by default and must be specifically requested to run. The (XRP) does not have a separate RBD for its secondary cache. For the (XRP) each RBD has a default number of tests that run at power-up, and another default number of tests that run when the program is called from the RBD monitor (see Table 2-4 and Table 2-5). The CPU diagnostic (RBD 0) runs all its tests in both modes. The power- up default for the CPU/memory interaction diagnostic (RBD 1) is 12 (scalar only--16 with the vector tests), and the callable default is all tests. The DWMBB diagnostic (RBD 2) runs 20 or 21 of the 26 tests as the default in both modes; tests 2, 3, 4, 10, 11, and 26 must be invoked by qualifier in callable mode. To run tests other than the default suite from the RBD monitor, issue a command such as the following, which invokes all DWMBB tests: RBDn> ST2/T=1:26 D See Section 7.4 for more details. RBD 3, the Memory diagnostic, does not run on power-up. In callable mode, 7 of 12 tests run when invoked; tests 2 through 8 are defaults. See Section 6.11 for information on calling additional tests. It is helpful to use the trace qualifier, /TR, with the RBD START command. (See Section 2.3.3.) This qualifier shows each individual test as it is run. If a test fails, the program displays error messages. By default, the RBDs continue testing after an error is encountered. Adding the halt-on- error qualifier, /HE, causes the program to halt when the first error is encountered. Testing can be aborted at any time by typing CTRL/C. Diagnostics 2-11 To exit RBD mode, type QUIT at the RBD prompt. 2-12 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual 2.3.2 START Command The RBD monitor START command invokes a specific RBD program. It takes an argument indicating the RBD program to be run, and can take any of 13 qualifiers. Example 2-2: START Command >>> T/R ! Command to enter RBD monitor program. RBD3> ! RBD monitor prompt, where 3 is the hexa- ! decimal node number of the processor ! that is currently receiving your input. RBD3> ST2/TR E ! Runs the default XBI tests, testing the ! (xbi_plus) at (XMI) node number E. Test results ! are written to the console terminal. RBD3> ST1/HE/IE/BE ! Runs the CPU/memory interaction RBD, halting ! on the first error encountered, inhibiting ! error output, ringing the bell when the ! first error is encountered. The START command syntax is: STn[/qualifier] [parameter] where: · n is the RBD to be run (see Table 2-4 and Table 2-5). · [/qualifier] is one of those listed in Section 2.3.3. · [parameter] is a program-specific value used in RBD 2 or RBD 3. (For the meaning of this parameter in RBD 2, see Section 7.4, and in RBD 3, see Section 6.11.) 2-14 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual 2.3.3 START Command Qualifiers The START command is the primary RBD program command. Its qualifiers act as switches, allowing you to control the output of the tests--to run portions of a test, to run nondefault tests, and to loop on tests. Table 2-6: START Command Qualifiers ------------------------------------------------------------ Qualifier Default Function ------------------------------------------------------------ /BE Disabled Bell sounds when an error is encountered /C Disabled Destructive test confirmation /DS Disabled Disable status reports /HE Disabled Halt on the test that incurs a hard error /HS Disabled Halt on the test that incurs a soft error ((XRP) only) /IE Disabled Inhibit all error output /IS Disabled Inhibit summary reports /LE Disabled Loop on the test that incurs a hard error /LS Disabled Loop on the test that incurs a soft error ((XRP) only) /P=n Enabled Make n passes of the test or tests indicated /QV Disabled Quick verify mode /T=n[:m] Enabled /T=n runs test n; /T=n:m runs a range of tests from n through m /TR Disabled Print a trace of test numbers, as they run ------------------------------------------------------------ NOTE: A qualifier is valid only for the command with which it is issued. Qualifiers do not remain in effect for the session. See Example 2-2 for examples and a description of the START command syntax. /BE causes a bell on the console terminal to ring when an error is encountered. This is useful when error printout is inhibited and a loop on intermittent error is set (/LE). Diagnostics 2-15 /C enables execution of destructive tests. See Example 2-7 and Section 6.11 for information on the destructive tests. /DS disables printout of the diagnostics test results. The summary report is run, unless it is specifically disabled. /HE halts on hard error and stops execution of tests as soon as the first hard error is encountered. (In this context, a hard error is defined as a recoverable, repeatable error, for example, a ROM checksum error. This differs from a fatal error, which is an unrecoverable fault, for example, an unexpected interrupt or exception. A fatal error is always cause for program abortion, regardless of the state of the /HE or /LE qualifier.) The test number is printed, and a summary indicating failure of the RBD is printed to the console terminal. Also the RBD monitor prompt is returned. Continue on error is the default condition, so if you want a halt on error, you must specifically invoke it in your command line. /HS halts on soft error and stops execution of tests as soon as the first soft error is encountered. This qualifier works only on the (XRP) module. (In this context, a soft error is defined as a recoverable error that goes away after retry, for example, a corrected read data memory error.) The test number is printed, and a summary indicating failure of the RBD is printed to the console terminal. Also the RBD monitor prompt is returned. Continue on soft error is the default condition, so if you want to halt on soft error, you must specifically invoke it in your command line. /IE inhibits all error output, suppressing printing of RBD results. This qualifier is used primarily for module repair, in conjunction with the /LE or /LS qualifier. Errors are counted even when the printing is disabled. /IS suppresses printout of RBD summary after the end of the last pass performed by the RBD. /LE loops on the test where the first hard error is detected. Even if the error is intermittent, looping continues on the test indicated. To terminate /LE, enter CTRL/C, CTRL/Z, or CTRL/Y. After entering one of these control characters, a summary report is printed. A fatal error causes the program to abort, regardless of the state of this qualifier. /LS loops on the test where the first soft error is detected. This qualifier works only on the (XRP) module. Even if the error is intermittent, looping continues on the test indicated. To terminate /LS, enter CTRL/C, CTRL/Z, or CTRL/Y. After entering one of these control characters, a summary report is printed. /P=n runs n passes of the RBD test invoked; n is a decimal number. If n is 0, all selected tests run for an infinite number of passes. If the /P qualifier is not used, the program defaults to one pass of the test invoked. When used 2-16 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual with the /T=n:m qualifier, you run a range of tests. To terminate /P=n, enter CTRL/C, CTRL/Z, or CTRL/Y. After entering one of these control characters, a summary reports prints out and the RBD monitor prompt returns. /QV selects the quick verify version of any selected test that supports this mode. /T=n[:m] selects individual tests (/T=n) or a range of tests (/T=n:m) where n and m are decimal numbers. For example, to run tests T0005 through T0008, use /T=5:8. If no /T qualifier is used, the diagnostic runs its default suite of tests. /TR prints each test number as it is completed. This qualifier allows you to trace the progress of the diagnostic as it runs. Without the /TR qualifier, just the summary line is printed. For both the (xyp) and the (XRP) a single parameter field can be appended to the START command string to control aspects of the diagnostic that are not covered by the qualifiers. The parameter must be appended after any qualifiers and separated from them by a space. The format of the parameter field is 4 hex characters. The use of a parameter field is implementation specific. Diagnostics 2-17 2.3.4 RBD Test Printout, Passing The RBD printout results are different when the RBD tests pass and when they fail. Example 2-3 shows a passing printout, and Example 2-4 is a sample failure printout. Example 2-3: RBD Test Printout, Passing >>> T/R ! Command to enter RBD monitor program at ! console prompt. RBD3> ! RBD monitor prompt, where 3 is the hexa- ! decimal node number of the processor ! that is currently receiving your input. RBD3> ST2/TR E ! Runs the XBI self-test, testing the (xbi_plus) ! at (XMI) node number E. Test results ! written to the console terminal: ; XBI_TEST! 3.00" ; T0001 T0005 T0006 T0007 T0008 T0009 T0012 T0013 T0014 T0015 ; T0016 T0017 T0018 T0019 T0020 T0021 T0022 T0023 T0024 T0025# ; P$ 3% 8082& 1' ; 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000( RBD3> QU) ! RBD prompt returns; test ran successfully. ! Exit RBD program. >>> The callouts in Example 2-3 are explained below. ! This entry designates which test is being run. Here it is the XBI_TEST, the self-test for the DWMBB. Below is a list of some XMI RBDs. XRP/V_ST RBD 0, the CPU tests for (XRP) XCPST RBD 0, the CPU tests for (xyp) CPUMEM RBD 1, the CPU/memory interaction tests XBI_TEST RBD 2, the DWMBB tests XMA_RBD RBD 3, the memory tests SLCRBD RBD4, the second-level cache tests for (xyp) " This field lists the revision number of the RBD program. 2-18 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual # These T00nn fields appear only with the /TR qualifier; each entry corresponds to a test being run and prints out as the test starts running. In a passing RBD, the final T00nn number corresponds to the last test run. Note that T0002 through T0004 and T0010, T0011, and T0026 are not executed. These tests are not part of the default selection and must be individually invoked by qualifier. For a list of the tests for each RBD and the definition of the tests, see the chapter for each module in this manual. $ This field indicates whether the RBD passed or failed; P for passed, F for failed. % This field is the XMI node number of the boot processor executing the RBD. It matches the number in your RBD prompt. & This field is 8082 for the (XRP) and 8001 for the (xyp)--the device type of the boot processor. ' This field displays the total number of passes (in decimal) executed by the RBD. The default number of passes is 1. If you use the START command with the qualifier /P=5, for example, then this field will show 5, indicating 5 passes were completed. ( This line contains the summary of the RBD failures. In a successful RBD run, the line will contain all zeros as shown here. Currently only the second and third fields are used. The second field contains the number of hard errors detected during the run. The third field contains the number of soft errors detected during the run. ) The console prompt is usually returned in response to the RBD QUIT command, as shown in this example. However, when some tests are run, the response to QUIT is a system reset. Self-test is then run, and the self-test results are printed. The tests that cause a system reset are: Test 1 and 22 of RBD 1; Tests 2, 3, 4, 10, and 11 of RBD 2; and Tests 4 and 8 of RBD 3. Diagnostics 2-19 2.3.5 RBD Test Printout, Failing The RBD printout results are different when the RBD passes and when it fails. Example 2-4 is a sample failure printout, and Example 2-3 shows a passing printout. Example 2-4: RBD Test Printout, Failing >>> T/R ! Command to enter RBD monitor program at ! console prompt. RBD2> ! RBD monitor prompt, where 2 is the hexa- ! decimal node number of the processor ! that is currently receiving your input. RBD2> ST0/TR ! Execute RBD 0 (CPU test) and trace results. ; XRP/V_ST 3.00 ; T0001 T0002 T0003 T0004 T0005 T0006 T0007 T0008 T0009 T0010 ; T0011 T0012 T0013 T0014 T0015 T0016 T0017 T0018! ; F" 2# 8082$ 1% ; HE& REX520' XX( T0018) ; 10+> AAAAAAAA+? A8AAAAAA+@ 00000000+A 000004AC+B 2006451F+C 01+D ; T0019 T0020 T0021 T0022 T0023 T0024 T0025 T0026 T0027 T0028 ; T0029 T0030 T0031 T0032 T0033 T0034 T0035 T0036 T0037+E ; F 2 8082 1+F ; 00000000 00000001+G 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 RBD2> ! RBD prompt returns; test completed. RBD2> QUIT ! Exit RBD program. >>> ! Console prompt reappears. The callouts in Example 2-4 are explained below. (See also Example 2-3 for explanation of other fields of the printout.) ! These T00nn fields appear only with the /TR qualifier; each entry corresponds to a test being run. The entry prints out as the test starts running. This T00nn number is the number of the failing test and is followed by a failure report. In this example, test 18 failed. The /HE qualifier was not used, so testing continues. " F indicates failure of the previous test listed, test 18. # This field is the XMI node number of the boot processor executing the RBD. It matches the number in your RBD prompt. 2-20 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual $ This field is the device type of the boot processor. % This field displays the total number of passes (in decimal) executed by the RBD. The default number of passes is 1. & The class of error is displayed here. HE indicates that the error was a hard error. SE means the error was a soft error, and FE indicates a fatal error. (See Section 2.3.3 for a definition of these errors.) ' This field describes the failing logic for the (XRP) and gives an abbreviated test name for the (xyp). Here, the processor chip of a (XRP), device type 8082, is the failing logic. ( This field is the unit number used in memory and DWMBB tests. ) This field lists the number of the test that failed; test 18 failed here. +> This is a two-digit (decimal) generic error code. +? The expected data is listed here. AAAAAAAA is the data test 18 expected. +@ The received data is listed here. A8AAAAAA is the data test 18 received. +A This field shows any unexpected interrupt vectors. +B This is the address in memory where the referenced error is found. +C This is the address of the failing PC at the time of error. +D This is the error number within the failing test. In this example, the failure was detected at the first possible failure point in T0018. This is a decimal field. +E This final T00nn number corresponds to the last test run. +F This entire line is the summary line, and a repeat of the failure summary. It lists the pass/fail code (P or F), the node number and device type number of the boot processor executing the RBD, and the number of passes of the RBD. +G This is the number of hard errors detected. Diagnostics 2-21 2.3.6 SUMMARY Command The RBD monitor SUMMARY command displays a summary of the last diagnostic run. Example 2-5: SUMMARY Command >>> T/R ! Command to enter RBD monitor program at ! console prompt. RBD1> ST0/IE/IS/P=100 ! Execute RBD 0 (CPU test), inhibiting ! error outputs and summary report. ; XRP/V_ST 3.00 RBD1> SU ! Request a summary. ; XRP/V_ST 3.00 ; P! 1" 8082# 100$ ; 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000% RBD1> 2-22 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual The callouts in Example 2-5 are explained below. ! This field indicates whether the RBD passed or failed; P for passed, F for failed. " This field is the XMI node number of the boot processor executing the RBD. It will match the number in your RBD prompt, which also indicates the node number of your boot processor. # This field is the device type number of the boot processor executing the RBD. $ This field displays the total number of passes executed by the RBD. % This line contains the summary of the RBD failures. Presently only the second and third fields are used. The second field contains the number of hard errors detected during the run. The third field contains the number of soft errors detected during the run. Diagnostics 2-23 2.3.7 Sample RBD Session Examples 2-6 and 2-7 show a sample RBD session. Example 2-6: Sample RBD Session, Part 1 of 2 >>> T/R! RBD1> ST0/TR" ;XRP/V_ST 3.00 ; T0001 T0002 T0003 T0004 T0005 T0006 T0007 T0008 T0009 T0010 ; T0011 T0012 T0013 T0014 T0015 T0016 T0017 T0018 T0019 T0020 ; T0021 T0022 T0023 T0024 T0025 T0026 T0027 T0028 T0029 T0030 ; T0031 T0032 T0033 T0034 T0035 T0036 T0037 ; P 1 8082 1 ;00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 000000000 00000000 00000000 RBD1> ST1/TR/HE# ;CPUMEM 3.00 ; T0001 T0002 T0003 T0004 T0005 T0006 T0007 T0008 T0009 T0010 ; T0011 T0012 T0013 ; P 1 8082 1 ;00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 000000000 00000000 00000000 RBD1> ST2 5$ ;XBI_TEST 3.00 ; F 1 8082 1 ; FE No_Unit 05 T0000 ; 00 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 200705E7 01 ; F 1 8082 1 ;00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 RBD1> ST2/TR/T=2:4/P=3 E% ;XBI_TEST 3.00 ; T0002 T0003 T0004 T0002 T0003 T0004 T0002 T0003 T0004 ; P 1 8082 3 ;00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 000000000 00000000 00000000 2-24 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual ! Enter RBD mode from console mode. The RBD prompt appears and indicates you are operating from the boot processor at node 1. " Run RBD 0 and trace the tests. The CPU test runs all 37 tests successfully. # Run RBD 1, trace it and halt on the first error found. All CPU/memory interaction RBD tests run and pass. $ Run RBD 2, testing the DWMBB at XMI node 5. The value NO_UNIT on the third line of output indicates that the node value of node 5 is not correct; no DWMBB was found at this node. % Run 3 passes of tests 2 through 4 of RBD 2 on node E with Trace Set. Note that the T00nn line lists each of the three tests three times, since the /P=3 called for 3 passes of the tests. And the final parameter in the summary line is a 3, indicating that 3 passes completed. Diagnostics 2-25 Example 2-7: Sample RBD Session, Part 2 of 2 RBD1> ST3/TR/T=1& RBD1> ST3/TR/T=1 RBD1> ST3/TR/T=1 /C' ;XMA_RBD 3.00 ; T0001 ; P 1 8082 1 ;00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 000000000 00000000 00000000 RBD1> QU( [self-test results may be displayed here] >>> SET CPU 2) >>> T/R RBD2> ST0/TR+> ;XRP/V_ST 3.00 ; T0001 T0002 T0003 T0004 T0005 T0006 T0007 T0008 T0009 T0010 ; T0011 T0012 T0013 T0014 T0015 T0016 T0017 T0018 T0019 T0020 ; T0021 T0022 T0023 T0024 T0025 T0026 T0027 T0028 T0029 T0030 ; T0031 T0032 T0033 T0034 T0035 T0036 T0037 ; P 2 8082 1 ;00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 000000000 00000000 00000000 2-26 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual & Run RBD 3, trace it, and run only test 1 of this RBD. This test is one of the memory tests that is not part of the default suite of tests. Test 1 corrupts memory. You must add a /C qualifier (Confirm) to the START command, to indicate that you do indeed intend to run this destructive test. The /C qualifier was not given in this example. The command line is echoed, waiting for /C to be typed. On a (rigel) you can either press Return and reenter the command with the /C qualifier, or you can type the /C qualifier followed by Return. On a (hyperion) you must enter the command line again adding the /C qualifier. ' Run RBD 3, trace the tests as they run, run only test 1, and /C allows the test to run. In this example, the test completed with no errors. ( Exit from RBD mode. Enter console mode. ) Make the next processor the primary processor so that RBD 0 can be run on it. +> Run RBD 0 and trace the tests. Here the CPU runs all 37 (XRP) tests successfully. Diagnostics 2-27 2.3.8 Running ROM-Based Diagnostics on VAXBI Devices Some VAXBI devices can be tested from the console terminal with their on-board ROM-based diagnostics. The Z console command is used to send commands to these VAXBI nodes. Example 2-8: VAXBI RBD Session >>> SHOW CONFIGURATION! Type Rev 1+ (XRP) (8082) 0007 A+ MS65A (4001) 0002 E+ DWMBB/A (2002) 0001 XBI E 1+ DWMBB/B (210F) 000A 5+ DMB32 (0109) 210B 6+ DEBNI (0118) 0100 7+ KDB50 (010E) 0F1C 8+ TBK70 (410B) 0307 >>> Z/BI:6 E" ?33 Z connection successfully started T/R# RBD6> ST 0/TR$ ;DEBNI_ST 1.02 ; T01 T02 T03 T04 T05 T06 T07 T08 ; P 6 0118 00000020 ;00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 ; PUDR: FFFFxxxx RBD6> QUIT% ^P ?31 Z connection terminated by ^P >>> Z/BI:8 E& ?33 Z connection successfully started T/R RBD8> ST 0/TR ;T1035_St 1.00 Example 2-8 Cont'd on next page 2-28 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Example 2-8 (Cont.): VAXBI RBD Session ; T01 T02 T03 T04 T05 T06 T07 T08 T09 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 ; T15 T16 T17 ; P 8 410B 00000001 ;00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 ; PUDR: 5FF43FDF RBD5> QUIT ^P ?31 Z connection terminated by ^P >>> The callouts in Example 2-8 are explained below. ! The SHOW CONFIGURATION console command shows that this system includes a DEBNI at node 6 of the VAXBI attached at XMI node E, and a TBK70 at node 8 of the VAXBI attached at XMI node E. " The Z command is typed at the console prompt. A connection is established to node 6 (/BI:6) of the VAXBI connected at XMI node E (E). The console returns a message confirming that the connection has been made. # After the console message is returned in ", no prompt is printed. Typing T/R invokes the RBD monitor on the VAXBI adapter being tested and returns the RBD monitor prompt. Note that the "6" in the RBD prompt refers to the VAXBI node. $ The START command for VAXBI RBDs requires a space before the 0. When run with the /TR qualifier, test traces are printed. The last line of the summary report indicates the contents of the Power-Up Diagnostic Register. Refer to the technical manual for the device being tested to interpret the contents reported. % The QUIT command exits the RBD monitor. The Z connection remains until CTRL/P is entered. & Steps " through % are repeated to run the RBD of the TBK70 at node 8 of the VAXBI attached at XMI node E. Diagnostics 2-29 2.4 VAX Diagnostic Supervisor Programs The VAX Diagnostic Supervisor (VAX/DS) is a monitor that controls operation of a diagnostic program. You can use VAX/DS in one of two modes: standalone mode (exclusive use of the system) or user mode (under the VMS operating system). Table 2-7: VAX Diagnostic Program Levels ------------------------------------------------------------ Level Type of Test Run-Time Environment ------------------------------------------------------------ 1 System exercisers Runs under the VMS operating sys- tem without VAX/DS 2R Function tests of peripheral devices Runs under the VMS operating sys- tem with VAX/DS 2 Exercisers and function tests of peripheral devices and processors Runs under VAX/DS in user mode and standalone mode 3 Function tests and logic tests of peripheral devices and processors Runs under VAX/DS in standalone mode ------------------------------------------------------------ Table 2-8: VAX/DS Documentation ------------------------------------------------------------ Document Order Number ------------------------------------------------------------ VAX Diagnostic Supervisor User 's Guide AA-FK66A-TE VAX Diagnostic Software Handbook AA-F152A-TE VAX Diagnostic Design Guide AA-FK67A-TE VAX Systems Hardware Handbook EB-31692-46 ------------------------------------------------------------ 2-30 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual The VAX Diagnostic Supervisor (VAX/DS) can be run in interactive mode. You type commands in response to the VAX/DS program prompt: DS> VAX/DS lets you load diagnostic programs into system memory, select devices to be tested, and run the programs. The VAX/DS command language also lets you control the execution of diagnostic programs; you can specify which tests or sections of a program should run, and how many passes it should run. You can also show the current state of parameters that affect the operation of diagnostic programs. The programs report their results through VAX/DS to the terminal. VAX/DS supports three types of diagnostic programs: · Logic tests Test a specific section of a device's logic circuitry. Logic tests provide the greatest degree of detail in determining the location of faulty hardware. · Function tests Test the functions of the device. For example, a function test for a disk drive would test the drive's reading and writing capabilities. Function tests can detect the location of faulty hardware, although the results may be less exact than those of a logic test. · Exercisers Test entire systems or subsystems and verify that a system can function properly over a period of time. Exercisers can detect both hardware faults resulting from the simultaneous use of a system's numerous devices and intermittent faults occurring only once or twice over a long period of time. Table 2-9 lists the VAX/DS programs available for the (rigel) and (hyperion) systems. Each program has a HELP file available. To access the help files for any diagnostic, at the VAX/DS prompt, type: DS> HELP [VAX/DS diagnostic program name] Diagnostics 2-31 2.4.1 Booting the Diagnostic Supervisor from a CD Server To boot the Diagnostic Supervisor from a CD server, set an additional control flag in R5 and enter ISL_LVAX at the filename prompt. Example 2-9: Booting the Diagnostic Supervisor over the Ethernet >>> BOOT /XMI:E /BI:C /R5:110 ET0 ! Initializing system [Self-test display prints] Loading system software Filename: ISL_LVAX " [Several establishing link messages] Ethernet Initial System Load Function FUNCTION FUNCTION ID 1 - Display Menu 2 - Help 3 - Choose Service # 4 - Stop Enter a function Id value: 3 # Service options: 1 = Find Services 2 = Enter Known Service Name =>1 $ Working Servers found: 1 Service Name Format: Service Name Server Name Ethernet ID #1 VMS054 ESS_08002B15FCE1 08-00-2B-15-FC-E1 Example 2-9 Cont'd on next page 2-32 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Example 2-9 (Cont.): Booting the Diagnostic Supervisor over the Ethernet #2 NSS_SYSDISK ESS_08002B15FCE1 08-00-2B-15-FC-E1 #3 6000_DIAG_A ESS_08002B15FCE1 08-00-2B-15-FC-E1 Enter a number =>3 % [Diagnostic Supervisor Banner prints] DS> After placing a CDROM cartridge labeled 6000_DIAG_* in a CD server on the network, your system can access and boot the Diagnostic Supervisor from the Ethernet. ! At the console prompt enter a boot command identifying a path to the CD server. Should the Ethernet be attached directly to the XMI through a DEMNA, you will not need the /BI qualifier and you will need to change the device name to EXnn. R5 = 110 sets two flags for VMB. Bit 4 specifies the Diagnostic Supervisor. Bit 8 prompts for a secondary loader. " At the prompt, "Filename" type ISL_LVAX -- the secondary loader. The system loads software and identifies various functions available. # At the prompt, "Enter a function Id value:" enter a 3 to Choose Service. $ Assuming you do not know the Service Name or number, at the "=>" prompt enter a 1 to Find Services, otherwise enter a 2. The available services are then located and shown. You should see the name of the CD you just put into the CD server. % At the "Enter a number =>" prompt, enter the number of the server that has the CD with the Diagnostic Supervisor on it. The Diagnostic Supervisor then boots. Diagnostics 2-33 2.4.2 Running VAX/DS You can use VAX/DS in one of two modes: standalone mode (exclusive use of the system) or user mode (under VMS). There are several methods of booting the VAX/DS in standalone mode any one of which can be used. Section 2.4.1 shows one, Example 2-10 shows another, and Example 2-12 shows a third. Example 2-10: Running Standalone VAX/DS from a TK70 >>> BOOT/R5:10 CSA1 ! Enter BOOT command designating the ! TK tape drive as input device; /R5:10 ! is the boot flag indicating the ! VAX/DS program. [self-test results print] Loading system software. VAX DIAGNOSTIC SOFTWARE PROPERTY OF DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION ***CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY*** Use Authorized Only Pursuant to a Valid Right-to-Use License Copyright, Digital Equipment Corporation, 1990. All Rights Reserved. DIAGNOSTIC SUPERVISOR. ZZ-ERSAA-14.X-NNNN 1-JAN-1990 12:01:45 DS> ! System boots VAX/DS and displays banner. ! Run VAX/DS level 3 or 2 programs. DS> ^P ! Enter CTRL/P to exit VAX/DS ?02 External halt (CTRL/P, break, or external halt) PC = 00027056 PSL = 00000200 KSP = 0004D210 >>> ! Console prompt returns. 2-34 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Example 2-11: Running VAX/DS in User Mode $ ! At the operating system prompt, run $ RUN ERSAA ! the VAX/DS program. [VAX/DS banner prints, as in example above] DS> ! VAX/DS prompt appears. ! Run VAX/DS level 2R or 2 programs. DS> EXIT ! Type EXIT to exit VAX/DS $ ! Operating system prompt returns. Table 2-7 describes the levels of VAX/DS programs. Check Table 2-9 for the programs you wish to run, and determine if you will run VAX/DS in standalone or user mode. To run VAX/DS in standalone mode on systems with a TK70 insert a TK tape containing the VAX/DS program into the TK tape drive on the system. At the console prompt, boot VAX/DS from the TK tape using the /R5:10 qualifier: >>> BOOT /R5:10 CSA1 where CSA1 is the device name for the TK tape drive, and /R5:10 sets the boot flag designating the VAX/DS program (see Example 2-10). To run VAX/DS in standalone mode from a CD server, see Section 2.4.1. To run VAX/DS in user mode under VMS, you use the RUN command under your operating system (see Example 2-11). In either standalone or user mode, VAX/DS functions the same way. Typically a diagnostic running in user mode provides less detailed results than one running in standalone mode. For more information on VAX/DS, see the documents listed in Table 2-8. Diagnostics 2-35 2.4.3 Sample VAX/DS Session When you run the VAX/DS programs, run the system autosizer program EVSBA first. This program, which takes several minutes to execute, will save you time as you proceed with other tests. Certain conditions cause the generation of an unexpected trap or interrupt. Use the method shown to avoid these conditions. Example 2-12: Sample VAX/DS Session, Part 1 of 3 >>> SET BOOT DIAG /XMI:B /R5:10 DUA0 !booting through a KDM70 >>> BOOT DIAG! [self-test results print] Loading system software. VAX DIAGNOSTIC SOFTWARE PROPERTY OF DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION ***CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY*** Use Authorized Only Pursuant to a Valid Right-to-Use License Copyright, Digital Equipment Corporation, 1990. All Rights Reserved. DIAGNOSTIC SUPERVISOR. ZZ-ERSAA-14.X-NNNN 1-JAN-1990 12:01:45 DS> RUN EVSBA" .. Program: EVSBA - AUTOSIZER level 3 X6.6, revision 6.6, 3 tests, at 17:52:20.21. .. End of run, 0 errors detected, pass count is 1, time is 31-DEC-1989 17:55:07.02 2-36 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual ! The SET BOOT command stores a nickname for a set of parameters to the BOOT command. (The lower key switch on the control panel must be set to Update when this command is issued.) This BOOT command loads VAX/DS from disk. Alternatively, you can use the command BOOT/R5:10 CSA1 if you have a TK70 as a load device, or you can boot over the Ethernet from a CD server. For more information on the BOOT and SET BOOT commands, see any of the VAX 6000 Owner 's Manuals. " The off-line autosizer program EVSBA identifies hardware on your system and builds a database for the VAX Diagnostic Supervisor. The autosizer eliminates the need for you to type in the name and characteristics of the hardware you intend to test under VAX/DS with level 3 diagnostic programs. Diagnostics 2-37 Example 2-13: Sample VAX/DS Session, Part 2 of 3 DS> SHOW DEV# _DWMBB1 DWMBB HUB 61F00000 XMI node # (1,2,3,4,B,C,D,E) =0000000E(X) BI Node Number (HEX)=00000001(X) _DUA KDB50 _DWMBB1 7C008000 BI Node Number (HEX)=00000004(X) _DJA23 RA60 _DUA 7C500000 _KA0 (XRP) HUB 61880000 XMI Node ID=00000001(X) _KA1 (XRP) HUB 61900000 XMI Node ID=00000002(X) _DWMBB0 DWMBB HUB 61E80000 XMI node # (1,2,3,4,B,C,D,E) =0000000D(X) BI Node Number (HEX)=00000001(X) _TXA DMB32 _DWMBB0 7A00A000 BI Node Number (HEX)=00000005(X) _ETA0 DEBNI _DWMBB0 7A00A000 BI Node Number (HEX)=00000006(X) _DUA2 RA82 _DUA 7C500000 _DUA61 RA82 _DUA 7C500000 _DUA TBK70 _DWMBB1 7C00C000 BI Node Number (HEX)=00000006(X) _MUA0 TK70 _DUA 7C580000 DS> SELECT ALL$ DS> SET TRACE DS> SET EVENT 2 DS> RUN ERKMP .. Program: ERKMP - (XRP) MP Exerciser, revision 1.0, 10 tests, at 18:11:41.25. Testing: _KA0 _KA1 Booting Secondary Processor #02 Test 1: Memory Interlock Test Test 2: Interprocessor Interrupt Test Test 3: Write Error Interrupt Test Test 4: Cache Invalidate Test Test 5: XMI Bus Arbitration Test Test 6: XMI Bus Arbitration Collision Test Test 7: XMI Lockout Test Test 8: Cache Coherency Test Test 9: XMI Suppress Assertion Test Test 10: Multiprocessor Exerciser .. End of run, 0 errors detected, pass count is 1, time is 31-DEC-1989 18:16:24.49 DS> ^P% ?02 External halt (CTRL/P, break, or external halt) PC = 00027056 PSL = 00000200 KSP = 0004D210 2-38 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual # The autosizer builds a table of devices for VAX/DS that can be printed by using the SHOW DEVICE/BRIEF command at the DS> prompt. The command lists system devices, similar to the SHOW CONFIGURATION command in console mode. $ When preparing to run a diagnostic, the SELECT ALL command selects all devices listed in # and the SET TRACE command enables printing of test numbers and names when the diagnostic runs. If you run another diagnostic after this one and you want the tests traced, you will need to issue the SET TRACE command again. The SET EVENT 2 command disables some informational messages printed by this particular diagnostic. % An external halt causes VAX/DS to print the contents of the program counter, the processor status longword, and the stack pointer. Since VAX/DS was called from console mode, the console prompt is returned. In a (rigel) system an external halt can, in some cases, cause an unexpected trap or interrupt through SCB vector 60. The remainder of this example shows how to avoid this condition by using the CLEAR EXCEPTION command and what happens if the condition is not cleared by the console. The condition does NOT apply to the (hyperion). Diagnostics 2-39 Example 2-14: Sample VAX/DS Session (Model 400 Only), Part 3 of 3 >>> CLEAR EXCEPTION & XBER = 00000041 ! no error bits set XFADR = 61880008 ! no error bits set RCSR = 01240001 ! no error bits set >>> SHOW CONFIGURATION ' Type Rev 1+ KA64A (8082) 0007 3+ KA64A (8082) 0007 A+ MS65A (4001) 0002 B+ MS65A (4001) 0002 E+ DWMBB/A (2002) 0001 XBI E 1+ DWMBB/B (210F) 000A 2+ CIBCA (0108) 41C1 4+ KDB50 (010E) 0F1C 5+ DMB32 (0109) 210B 6+ TBK70 (410B) 0307 8+ DEBNI (0118) 0100 >>> CLEAR EXCEPTION ( XBER = 8001B041 ! error bits set XFADR = 61900000 ! error bits set RCSR = 012C0011 ! error bits set >>> CONTINUE ) ! No errors seen DS> appears DS> DS> ^P ?02 External halt (CTRL/P, break, or external halt) PC = 0002704A PSL = 00000204 KSP = 0004D210 >>> SHOW CONFIGURATION . . . >>> CONTINUE +> ! Errors seen before DS> appears ?? Unexpected trap or interrupt thru SCB vector 0060 PC at error: 0002704A(X) PSL at error: 00000004(X) ; CUR=KERNEL,PRV=KERNEL,IPL=00(X),Z User return PC: none found! DS> CONTINUE .. Continuing from 0002704A DS> 2-40 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual & The CLEAR EXCEPTION command prints the contents of three registers (XBER, XFADR, and RCSR) and then clears their error bits, if set. No error bits have been set at this point. ' The SHOW CONFIGURATION command attempts to examine unused address space, creating errors. ( Issuing the CLEAR EXCEPTION command again shows the contents of the three registers with error bits set. These error bits are then cleared by the command. When VAX/DS is halted as it was in % of part 2 of this example and a command is issued that causes errors, as in ', the CLEAR EXCEPTION command must be issued before issuing the CONTINUE command to resume the VAX/DS session. ) VAX/DS is halted and SHOW CONFIGURATION is issued, again creating errors. (The response to SHOW CONFIGURATION is the same as shown in '.) +> This time the CONTINUE command is issued +> without first issuing the CLEAR EXCEPTION command. Since error bits were not cleared, VAX/DS attempts to perform its error recovery procedures, and an interrupt occurs. This is normal behavior for a (rigel) system in these circumstances. Diagnostics 2-41 2.4.4 VAX/DS Diagnostics Table 2-9 lists the VAX Diagnostic Supervisor tests available for both Model 400 and Model 300 systems. Table 2-9: VAX Diagnostic Supervisor Programs ------------------------------------------------------------ Diagnostic Level Diagnostic Title ------------------------------------------------------------ ERSAA 1 (rigel) Diagnostic Supervisor ELSAA 2 (hyperion) Diagnostic Supervisor EVSBA 3 VAX Standalone Autosizer EVSBB 1 VAX Diagnostic Online Autosizer ------------------------------------------------------------ VAX 6000 EEPROM Update Utility ------------------------------------------------------------ EVUCA 3 VAX 6000 EEPROM Update Utility ------------------------------------------------------------ (xyp)-Specific Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ ELKAX 2 3 Manual Tests (5-6 min) ELKMP 2 3 Multiprocessor Exerciser (2 min--quick ) (4 min--default) ------------------------------------------------------------ (XRP)-Specific Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ ERKAX 1 3 Manual Tests (5-6 min 2 ) ERKMP 1 3 Multiprocessor Exerciser (2 min--quick) (4 min--default) ------------------------------------------------------------ (xrv)-Specific Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ 1 Diagnostic software with file names beginning with ER are tests created specifi- cally for the (rigel) system. This software is not transportable. 2 Diagnostic software with file names beginning with EL are tests created specifi- cally for the (Hyperion) system. 2-42 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 2-9 (Cont.): VAX Diagnostic Supervisor Programs ------------------------------------------------------------ Diagnostic Level Diagnostic Title ------------------------------------------------------------ (xrv)-Specific Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ EVKAG 2 VAX Vector Instruction Exerciser, Part 1 (1 1/2 min--quick) (16 min--default) EVKAH 2 VAX Vector Instruction Exerciser, Part 2 (1 min--quick) (18 min--default) ------------------------------------------------------------ VAX CPU Cluster Exerciser ------------------------------------------------------------ EVKAQ 2 VAX Basic Instructions Exerciser, Part 1 EVKAR 2 VAX Basic Instructions Exerciser, Part 2 EVKAS 2 VAX Floating-Point Instruction Exerciser, Part 1 EVKAT 2 VAX Floating-Point Instruction Exerciser, Part 2 EVKAU 3 VAX Privileged Architecture Instruction Test, Part 1 EVKAV 3 VAX Privileged Architecture Instruction Test, Part 2 ------------------------------------------------------------ XMA Online Memory Diagnostic ------------------------------------------------------------ EVKAM 2R VAX Memory User Mode Test ------------------------------------------------------------ DEMNA Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ EVDYE 2R DEMNA NI Functional Diagnostic EVGDB 2 DEMNA EEPROM Update Utility EVDWC 2R VAX NI Exerciser ------------------------------------------------------------ KDM70 Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ EVRAE 2R Generic MSCP Disk Exerciser EVRLJ 3 VAX UDA50/KDB50/KDM70 Exerciser EVRLM 3 KDM70 EEPROM Update Utility EVRLN 3 DUP Control Program Diagnostics 2-43 Table 2-9 (Cont.): VAX Diagnostic Supervisor Programs ------------------------------------------------------------ Diagnostic Level Diagnostic Title ------------------------------------------------------------ CIXCD Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ EVGAA 3 CI Functional Test Part I EVGAB 3 CI Functional Test Part II EVGAC 3 Standalone CI Exerciser EVXCI 1 VAX CI Exerciser EVGEA 3 CIXCD Functional Test EVGEB 3 CIXCD EEPROM Update Utility ------------------------------------------------------------ KDB50 Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ EVRLF 3 UDA50/KDB50 Basic Subsystem Diagnostic EVRLG 3 UDA50/KDB50 Disk Drive Exerciser EVRLB 3 VAX RAxx Formatter EVRLJ 3 VAX UDA50-A/KDB50 Subsystem Exerciser EVRLK 3 VAX Bad Block Replace Utility EVRLL 3 Disk Drive Internal Error Log Utility EVRAE 2R VAX Generic MSCP Disk Exerciser ------------------------------------------------------------ DEBNA Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ EVDYD 2R DEBNA Online Functional Diagnostic EVDWC 2R VAX NI Exerciser ------------------------------------------------------------ DEBNI Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ EVDYE 2R DEBNI Online Functional Diagnostic EVDWC 2R VAX NI Exerciser ------------------------------------------------------------ TBK Diagnostic ------------------------------------------------------------ EVMDA 2R TK Data Reliability Exerciser 2-44 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 2-9 (Cont.): VAX Diagnostic Supervisor Programs ------------------------------------------------------------ Diagnostic Level Diagnostic Title ------------------------------------------------------------ CIBCA-AA Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ EVGCA 3 T1015 Repair Level Diagnostic, Part 1 EVGCB 3 T1015 Repair Level Diagnostic, Part 2 EVGCC 3 T1015 Repair Level Diagnostic, Part 3 EVGCD 3 T1015 Repair Level Diagnostic, Part 4 EVGCE 3 T1025 Repair Level Diagnostic EVGAA 3 CI Functional Diagnostic, Part 1 EVGAB 3 CI Functional Diagnostic, Part 2 EVGDA 3 CIBCA EEPROM Program and Update Utility EVXCI 1 VAX CI Exerciser ------------------------------------------------------------ CIBCA-BA Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ EVGEE 3 CIBCA-BA Repair Level Diagnostic, Part 1 EVGEF 3 CIBCA-BA Repair Level Diagnostic, Part 2 EVGEG 3 CIBCA-BA Repair Level Diagnostic, Part 3 EVGAA 3 CI Functional Diagnostic, Part 1 EVGAB 3 CI Functional Diagnostic, Part 2 EVGDA 3 CIBCA EEPROM Program and Update Utility EVXCI 1 VAX CI Exerciser ------------------------------------------------------------ KLESI-B/TU81 Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ EVMBA 2R VAX TU81 Data Reliability Diagnostic EVMBB 3 VAX Front-End/Host Functional Diagnostic ------------------------------------------------------------ DHB32 Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ EVDAR 3 DHB32 Diagnostics EVDAS 2R DHB32 Macrodiagnostics Diagnostics 2-45 Table 2-9 (Cont.): VAX Diagnostic Supervisor Programs ------------------------------------------------------------ Diagnostic Level Diagnostic Title ------------------------------------------------------------ DMB32 Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ EVAAA 2R VAX Line Printer Diagnostic EVDAJ 2R DMB32 Online Asynchronous Port Test EVDAK 3 DMB32 standalone Functional Verification EVDAL 2R DMB32 Online Synchronous Port Test EVDAN 2R DMB32 Online Data Communications Link ------------------------------------------------------------ DRB32 Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ EVDRH 3 DRB32-M, -E Functional Diagnostic EVDRI 3 DRB32-W Functional Diagnostic ------------------------------------------------------------ TM32 Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ EVMEA 2R TM32 L2R Reliability Diagnostic EVMEB 3 TM32 L3 Functional Diagnostic, Part 1 EVMEC 3 TM32 L3 Functional Diagnostic, Part 2 ------------------------------------------------------------ UNIBUS Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ EVCBB 3 VAX DWBUA VAXBI to UNIBUS EVDRB 2R VAX DR11W Online Diagnostic EVDRE 3 VAX DR11W Repair Level Diagnostic EVDUP 3 DUP11 Repair Level, Part 1 EVDUQ 3 DUP11 Repair Level, Part 2 EVAAA 2R VAX Line Printer Diagnostic (LP11) ------------------------------------------------------------ DSB32 Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ EVDAP 3 DSB32 Level 3 Diagnostic EVDAQ 2R DSB32 Level 2R Diagnostic 2-46 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 2-9 (Cont.): VAX Diagnostic Supervisor Programs ------------------------------------------------------------ Diagnostic Level Diagnostic Title ------------------------------------------------------------ RV20 Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ EVRVA 3 RV20 Level 3 Functional Diagnostic EVRVB 2R RV20 Level 2R Diagnostic ------------------------------------------------------------ Diagnostics 2-47 Chapter 3 (xyp) Scalar Processor ------------------------------------------------------------ This chapter contains the following sections: · KA62B Physical Description and Specifications · Configuration Rules · Functional Description · Boot Processor · Power-Up Sequence · (xyp) Self-Test Results: Console Display · (xyp) Self-Test Results: Module LEDs · ROM-Based Diagnostics (xyp) Self-Test RBD CPU/Memory Test RBD Second-Level Cache RBD · VAX/DS Diagnostics · Machine Checks · Console Commands · CPU Replacement in Single CPU System Using the RESTORE Command Using SET Commands · CPU Replacement in Multiple CPU Systems · How to Add a New Processor · Patching the EEPROM with EVUCA · (XYP) Registers (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-1 3.1 KA62B Physical Description and Specifications The (xyp) is a single-module VAX processor based on a single CPU chip and a floating-point accelerator chip. The module designation is T2011-YA. Features of the module are shown in Figure 3-1. Figure 3-1: (XYP) Module 3-2 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 3-1: KA62B Specifications ------------------------------------------------------------ Parameter Description ------------------------------------------------------------ Module Number: T2011-YA Dimensions: 23.3 cm (9.2") H x 0.6 cm (0.25") W x 28.0 cm (11.0") D Temperature: Storage Range -40 o C to 66 o C (-40 o F to 151 o F) Operating Range 5 o C to 50 o C (41 o F to 122 o F) Relative Humidity: Storage 10 to 95% noncondensing Operating 10 to 95% noncondensing Altitude: Storage Up to 4.8 km (16,000 ft) Operating Up to 2.4 km (8000 ft) Current: 8.2A at +5V Power: 41W Cables: None Diagnostics: ROM-based diagnostics (0, 1, and 4) VDS diagnostics, see Section 3.9. ------------------------------------------------------------ (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-3 3.2 (xyp) Configuration Rules The (xyp) module will operate in any slot. Processors usually go on the right, beginning with slot 1. The maximum number of (xyp)s in a (hyperion) is six. Figure 3-2: Typical (xyp) Configuration 3-4 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual By convention, processors are placed in the right (XMI) slots, beginning with slot 1. Memories are placed in the middle slots, from slot A to slot 5 and then slots B and C. A VAXBI adapter, if installed, occupies slot E. If a processor is failing intermittently and you are working on a system remotely, you may want to leave the module in the system temporarily and prevent the operating system from using that processor. To disable a CPU: 1. Enter console mode. 2. Use the command SET CPU/NOENABLE to remove the processor from the software configuration. 3. Reboot the operating system. The console self-test display does not indicate that a CPU has been disabled. However, the SHOW CPU command reports which CPUs have been disabled on the /NOENABLED line of its display. (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-5 3.3 KA62B Functional Description The (xyp) processor has four functional sections (see Figure 3-3): the CPU section, the second-level cache, the XMI interface, and the console and diagnostics sections. Figure 3-3: (xyp) Block Diagram 3-6 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual The CPU section includes: · The CVAX processor chip, which supports the VAX Base Instruction Group and data types. It has full VAX memory management including demand paging and 4 Gbytes of virtual memory. The CPU chip includes the first-level cache, for I-stream (instruction) storage only. First-level cache is 1 Kbyte, organized with 128 tags. Cache is write-through, two-way associative, and is filled eight bytes at a time. · A floating-point accelerator chip, which supports the VAX Base Instruction Group floating-point instruction set. Data types supported by the hardware are D_floating, F_floating, and G_floating. · The clock chip includes a VAX standard time-of-year (TOY) clock with access to battery backup, an interval timer with 10 ms interrupts, and two programmable timers. The second-level cache is for both I-stream and D-stream (data) storage. Second-level cache is 256 Kbytes, organized with 4096 tags. Cache is write- through and direct-mapped. If a processor read misses an entry in the cache, or if the entry is invalid, the XMI gate array reads the data from main memory. Cache is filled 32 bytes at a time; the first longword read satisfies the processor 's read request. The (XMI) interface includes: · An octaword write buffer that decreases bus and memory controller bandwidth needs by packing writes into larger, more efficient blocks prior to sending them to main memory. · Hexword cache fill logic that loads the second-level cache with eight longwords of data on each cache miss. · (XMI) write monitoring logic that uses a duplicate tag store to detect when another (XMI) node writes a memory location that is cached on this processor. Then the gate array invalidates the corresponding entry in the second-level cache. · Full set of error recovery and logging capabilities. (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-7 Example 3-1: ROM and EEPROM Version Numbers F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NODE # A . A . M M M M . . P P P P TYP o . + . + + + + . . + + + + STF . . . . . . . . . . E E E B BPD . . . . . . . . . . + + + + ETF . . . . . . . . . . E E E B BPD . . . . . . . . . + . + . + + . XBI E + . . . . A4 A3 A2 A1 . . . . . . ILV . . . . 64 64 64 64 . . . . . . 256Mb ROM = 6.0 EEPROM = 2.0/6.1 SN = SGO1234567 ! " # 3-8 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual The console and diagnostics sections include: · A console read-only memory (ROM). This ROM contains code to initialize and boot the system and execute console commands. The last line of the self-test display shows the ROM version. In this example, the callout ! indicates that the console ROM is version 6.0. · A diagnostic ROM, which contains the power-up self-test and extended diagnostics. The diagnostic ROM has the same version number as the console ROM !. · An electrically-erasable, programmable ROM (EEPROM), which contains system parameters and boot code. You can modify the parameters with the console SET commands. Patches read into a special area of the EEPROM patch the console and diagnostic code in ROM. A program run under the VAX Diagnostic Supervisor is used to patch the EEPROM. See Section 3.15, Patching the EEPROM with EVUCA. The last line of the self-test display shows two EEPROM version numbers. The first number " indicates the format version of the EEPROM. This version is changed only when the internal structure of the EEPROM is modified. The second number # is the revision of ROM patches that have been applied to the EEPROM. The major number in this revision (before the decimal point) corresponds to the major number of the ROM revision !. The minor number indicates the actual patch revision. In this example, the EEPROM has been patched once for console ROM 6 and the patch revision is .1 . The location of the two ROMs and the EEPROM can be seen in Figure 3-1, Section 3.1. · A system support chip (SSC) contains circuits for writing the EEPROM, controlling the console, and timer support. On the module, the red LED next to the yellow LED is controlled by the SSC. When the power-up tests have completed successfully, the SSC on the boot processor turns off this LED. (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-9 3.4 Boot Processor The (hyperion) system is designed so that all processors share system resources equally. Because only one processor can boot the system or use the console at any given time, this processor is designated the primary or boot processor. The others are called secondary processors. The boot processor is selected during the power-up sequence. Figure 3-4: Selection of Boot Processor 3-10 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Using boot code stored in its EEPROM, the boot processor reads the boot block from a specified device. Booting may be triggered by a command issued to the boot processor from the console, or by a system reset with the bottom key switch in the Auto Start position. The boot processor also communicates with the system console, using the common console lines on the backplane. When you change system parameters in the EEPROM using SET commands, the boot processor automatically copies the new values to the EEPROMs on the secondary processors. If you swap in a new (xyp) module, it should be configured as a secondary processor. Then you can either use the UPDATE command to copy the boot processor 's entire EEPROM to the new secondary or use EVUCA and a series of SET commands to customize the EEPROM. Since UPDATE is slow, and can, in certain instances, render a processor unusable, the preferred method of updating a new processor placed in a system is to do it using SET commands. See Section 3.15 for information on running EVUCA and Section 3.12.2 on setting parameters. CAUTION: Using UPDATE can be dangerous because of revision mismatches. See Appendix C for information on what happens in mismatched cases. Usually the processor with the lowest (XMI) node number (which is also the lowest slot number) is selected as the boot processor. However, if this processor does not pass all its power-up tests, the next higher-numbered processor is selected. This is one way the boot processor can change. The user also has control over boot processor selection with the SET CPU command. This command may declare a processor ineligible for selection. SET CPU can also select a boot processor explicitly. You can see the boot processor selection three ways: · In the self-test display, the boot processor is indicated by a B on lines labeled BPD. · In console mode, the command SHOW CPU displays the boot processor as "Current primary." · In program mode, the bottom red LED (next to the larger yellow LED) is off on the boot processor module. It is lit on secondary processors. (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-11 3.5 Power-Up Sequence Figure 3-5 shows the power-up sequence for (xyp) processors. All processors execute two phases of self-test, and a boot processor is selected. The boot processor tests VAXBI adapters, if present, and prints the self-test display. Figure 3-5: (xyp) Power-Up Sequence, Part 1 of 2 3-12 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual ! All CPUs execute their on-board self-tests at the beginning of the power- up tests. On the STF line of the self-test display, a plus sign (+) is shown for every module whose self-test passes (see Section 3.6). " The boot processor is determined as described in Section 3.4. On the first BPD line, the letter B corresponds to the processor selected as boot processor. Because the processors have not yet completed their power-up tests, the designated processor may later be disqualified from being boot processor. For this reason, the BPD line appears twice in the self-test display. # The boot processor tests all memory modules and then prints the results of self-test, lines NODE, TYP, STF, and BPD on the self-test display. The boot processor then signals all CPUs to start running the extended test. $ All CPUs execute an extended test using the memories. On the ETF line of the self-test display, a plus sign (+) is shown for every module that passes extended test. % If all CPUs pass the extended test, the original boot processor selection is still valid. Lines STF and ETF would be identical for all the processors. The yellow LED is lit on all processor modules that pass both power-up tests. On the secondary processors, the red LED next to the yellow one is also lit. On the boot processor, this red LED is off (see Figure 3-7). If the original boot processor fails the extended test (indicated by a minus sign (-) on line ETF), a new boot processor is selected. On the second BPD line, the letter B corresponds to the processor finally selected as boot processor. (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-13 Figure 3-6: (XYP) Power-Up Sequence, Part 2 of 2 3-14 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual & The boot processor prints the ETF line and the second BPD line of the self-test display. If none of the processors is successfully selected as the boot processor, no self-test results are displayed and the console hangs. You can identify this hung state by examining the LEDs on the processor modules (see Section 3.7). All yellow LEDs will be OFF. The group of six red LEDS will flash two alternate patterns, and in one pattern only the bottom light will be ON. You can force a processor to become the boot processor so that it will display self-test results by typing the following: >>n where n is the CPU to become the boot processor. ' The boot processor tests the DWMBB if one is present. Test results are indicated on the lines labeled XBI on the self-test display. A plus sign (+) at the right means that the adapter test passed; a minus sign (-) means that the test failed. (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-15 3.6 (xyp) Self-Test Results: Console Display You can check the (xyp) self-test results both in the self-test display and in the lights on the module. Pertinent information in the self-test display is shown in Example 3-2. Example 3-2: Self-Test Results F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NODE # A . A A M M M M . . P P P P TYP ! o . + + + + + + . . + + + + STF " . . . . . . . . . . E E D B BPD # . . . . . . . . . . + + + - ETF $ . . . . . . . . . . E B D E BPD % . . . . . + + . . + . + . + + . XBI E + . . . . A4 A3 A2 A1 . . . . . . ILV . . . . 64 64 64 64 . . . . . . 256Mb ROM = 6.0 EEPROM = 2.0/6.0 SN = SGO1234567 & >>> 3-16 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual ! The second line in the self-test display indicates the type (TYP) of module at each (XMI) node. Processors are type P. In this example, processors are at nodes 1, 2, 3, and 4. " The third line shows self-test fail status (STF), which are the results of on-board self-test. Possible values for processors are: + (pass) - (fail) All processors passed self-test in this example. # The BPD line indicates boot processor determination. When the system completes on-board self-test, the processor with the lowest ID number that passes self-test and is eligible (designated by an E on the BPD line) is selected as boot processor -- in this example, the processor at node 1. The results on the BPD line indicate: · B -- The boot processor · E -- Processors eligible to become the boot processor · D -- Processors ineligible to become the boot processor $ During extended testing (ETF) all processors run a test, which includes reading and writing memory and using the cache. On line ETF, results are reported for each processor in the same way as on line STF--a plus sign indicates that extended self-test passed and a minus sign that extended test failed. In this example, the processor at node 1 (originally selected boot processor) failed the CPU/memory extended test. % Another BPD line is displayed, because it is possible for a different CPU to be designated boot processor before the system actually boots. This occurs in this example, because the processor at node 1 failed the extended test. The lowest-numbered processor that passed both tests is the processor at node 2. However, a previous SET CPU/ NOPRIMARY command has made this processor ineligible to be boot processor (indicated by the designation D on the BPD line). Therefore, the processor at node 3 is designated boot processor. & The bottom line of the self-test display shows the ROM and EEPROM version numbers and the system serial number. (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-17 3.7 (xyp) Self-Test Results: Module LEDs You can check (XYP) self-test results both in the self-test display and in the lights on the module. As shown in Figure 3-7, if self-test passes, the large yellow LED is on. 3-18 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Figure 3-7: (xyp) LEDs After Power-Up Self-Test (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-19 NOTE: The two processors in this book have different LED patterns. Refer to Section 4.7 for interpreting (XRP) LEDs. The large yellow LED at the bottom of the LED array is ON if self-test passes and OFF if self-test fails. (Here self-test means both the on-board power-up test and the extended CPU/memory test.) On the boot processor module, the red LED next to the yellow is OFF. This LED, which is controlled by the SSC chip, is ON on all the secondary processors. The six red LEDs on top are all OFF if self-test passes. If any of the LEDs is ON, self-test failed and the LEDs contain a binary error code. The error code corresponds to the number of the test that failed in hexadecimal. In the six error LEDs, the most significant bit is at the top, but the lights have a reverse interpretation -- a bit is ONE if the light is OFF. For example, assume a processor fails self-test (yellow LED is OFF), has a minus sign (-) on its STF line, and shows the following pattern in its top six LEDs: TOP (MSB) on 0 on 0 = 0 off 1 off 1 = E off 1 on 0 BOTTOM The failing test number decodes to 001110 (hex 0E, decimal 14). If you then ran the ROM-based diagnostic 0 with TRACE ON, the last test number you would see displayed is T0014. When any of the six red error LEDs is lit, a failure has occurred during testing. There are three sets of power-up self-test: KA62B power-up tests, CPU/memory tests, and optionally the VAXBI adapter (DWMBB) tests. Interpretation of the processor board error LEDs depends on which set of tests was running at the time of failure. Table 3-2 decodes the LED conditions. 3-20 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Processor error LEDs can also indicate failures of memories or VAXBI adapters. Table 3-2: KA62B Error LEDs ------------------------------------------------------------ Yellow LED Error LEDs (hex) Diagnostic and Test No. (decimal) Device Failing Self- Test Line ------------------------------------------------------------ OFF 1-22 Power-up self-test (equivalent to RBD 0) T0001-T0034 KA62B STF OFF 25-38 CPU/memory test - Memory 1 (equivalent to RBD 1) T0001-T0020 MS65A 1 (module with lowest XMI node number) ETF OFF 39 CPU/memory test - Memory 2 T0002 (equivalent to ST 1/T=2) MS65A 2 ETF OFF 3A CPU/memory test - Memory 3 T0002 (equivalent to ST 1/T=2) MS65A 3 ETF OFF 3B CPU/memory test - Memory 4 T0002 (equivalent to ST 1/T=2) MS65A 4 ETF OFF 3C CPU/memory test - Memory 5 T0002 (equivalent to ST 1/T=2) MS65A 5 ETF OFF 3D CPU/memory test - Memory 6 T0002 (equivalent to ST 1/T=2) MS65A 6 ETF OFF 3E CPU/memory test - Memory 7 T0002 (equivalent to ST 1/T=2) MS65A 7 ETF OFF 3F CPU/memory test - Memory 8 T0002 (equivalent to ST 1/T=2) MS65A 8 ETF ON (boot processor) 1-1A DWMBB test (equivalent to RBD 2) T0001-T0026 See Table 7-5. DWMBB XBI ------------------------------------------------------------ 3-22 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual If a processor 's yellow LED is OFF and the six red LEDs show an error code in the range 1-22 (hex), the power-up self-test failed and the processor board is bad. On the self-test console display, the processor shows a minus sign (-) on the STF line. After the power-up tests, each processor runs the CPU/memory tests. If a test fails, the processor shows a minus sign (-) on the ETF line of the self- test console display. With the first memory, LED error codes are numbered from 25 to 38 (hex), to distinguish them from the power-up tests. For example, assume that a processor fails self-test (yellow LED is OFF) and shows the following pattern in the error LEDs: TOP (MSB) off 1 on 0 = 2 on 0 off 1 = 7 off 1 off 1 BOTTOM The failing test number decodes to 100111 (hex 27), which corresponds to the third CPU/memory test. If you then ran the ROM-based diagnostic 1 with TRACE ON, the last test number you would see displayed is T0003. Each processor, after testing with the first memory, runs the CPU/memory test on every other good memory module. (However, only CPU/memory test T0002 is run.) If a failure occurs, the memory module is probably bad, although the processor 's yellow light is OFF and the memory module's yellow light is ON. If several processors fail on the same memory, the memory is certainly bad. Try using SET MEMORY to configure the bad module out of the interleave set. For error codes higher than 38, consult Table 3-2 to determine the failing memory. The last series is the DWMBB tests. If one fails, the top six LEDs contain an error code, although the processor 's yellow self-test LED is ON (because the CPU itself has passed). The failing error code (converted to decimal) corresponds to a test number in Table 7-5. Note that only the boot processor performs the DWMBB tests, so the red LED next to the yellow LED is OFF. (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-23 3.8 ROM-Based Diagnostics The (xyp) ROM contains five diagnostics, which you run using the boot processor 's RBD monitor program described in Chapter 2. RBD 0, 1, and 4 test the boot processor. RBD 2 tests VAXBI adapters, and RBD 3 tests memories. Table 3-3: KA62B ROM-Based Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ Diagnostic Test ------------------------------------------------------------ 0 (xyp) power-up test 1 (xyp) extended CPU/memory test 2 (XBI_PLUS) tests 3 Memory test 4 Second-level cache test ------------------------------------------------------------ 3-24 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual RBD 0 is the same as the power-up self-test. It is useful for running several passes when a processor fails self-test intermittently. Section 3.8.1 shows an example and lists the tests. RBD 1 is the same as the extended CPU/memory test. It is useful for running several passes when a processor fails self-test intermittently. Section 3.8.2 shows an example and lists the tests. RBD 2 is the set of tests that the boot processor runs for each DWMBB VAXBI-to-XMI adapter when the system is powered on. (The DWMBB has no on-board self-test of its own.) The diagnostic reports whether the (XBI_PLUS) passed and whether each I/O device on that adapter 's VAXBI bus passed its own self-test. RBD 3 is a set of memory tests that sizes and runs extended tests on all of memory. Section 6.11 and Section 6.12 show an example of memory RBDs and list the tests. RBD 4 is a set of exhaustive cache tests. It is not meant to be used frequently--you must explicitly request each test to run. The complete set of seven tests takes over one hour. For a detailed explanation of the diagnostic printout, see Chapter 2. (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-25 3.8.1 (xyp) Self-Test -- RBD 0 RBD 0 is equivalent to the (xyp) power-up self-tests. Example 3-3: (xyp) Self-Test RBD 0 >>> ! Console program prompt. >>> T/R ! Command to enter RBD monitor program. RBD3> ! RBD monitor prompt, where 3 is the hexa- ! decimal node number of the boot processor. RBD3> START 0 /TRACE/HE ! Runs the KA62B self-test on boot processor ! Trace prints each test number; halt on error ! Test results written to the console terminal: ;XCPST 6.0 ; T0001 T0002 T0003 T0004 T0005 T0006 T0007 T0008 T0009 T0010 ; T0011 T0012 T0013 T0014 T0015 T0016 T0017 T0018 T0019 T0020 ; T0021 ! ; F " 3 8001 1 # ; HE XDEV_ERR 1 T0021 ! ; 21 00000000 00000001 00000000 00001420 1FFD074C 00040CD0 02 In the example above: ! test 21 failed, " F indicates failure, and # the diagnostic ran for one pass. Table 3-4: (xyp) Power-Up Test -- RBD 0 ------------------------------------------------------------ Test Function ------------------------------------------------------------ T0001 (xyp) ROM test T0002 SSC Base Address Register test T0003 SSC RAM test T0004 SSC Configuration Register test T0005 SSC Bus Timeout test T0006 SSC Programmable Address Decode test T0007 KA62B CSR1 test T0008 SSC Output Port test 3-26 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 3-4 (Cont.): (xyp) Power-Up Test -- RBD 0 ------------------------------------------------------------ Test Function ------------------------------------------------------------ T0009 KA62B EEPROM test T0010 SSC Interval Timer test T0011 SSC Programmable Timers tests T0012 SSC Console test T0013 SSC TOY Clock test T0014 CVAX Critical Path test T0015 Cache Data RAM March test T0016 Cache Mask Write test T0017 Cache Data Parity RAM March test T0018 CSR1:CPUD test T0019 CFPA test T0020 CFPA Critical Path test T0021 XDEV Register test T0022 XBER Register test T0023 XFADR Register test T0024 XGPR Register test T0025 KA62B CSR2 Register test T0026 XMI High Longword Data test T0027 Interprocessor IVINTR test T0028 Write Error IVINTR test T0029 CNAK Read test T0030 CNAK Write test T0031 CNAK IP/WE IVINTR test T0032 Multiple Interrupt test T0033 Parity Error CNAK Read test (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-27 Table 3-4 (Cont.): (xyp) Power-Up Test -- RBD 0 ------------------------------------------------------------ Test Function ------------------------------------------------------------ T0034 Parity Error CNAK Write test ------------------------------------------------------------ 3-28 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual 3.8.2 CPU/Memory Test -- RBD 1 RBD 1 is equivalent to the extended CPU/memory test. Example 3-4: CPU/memory Test RBD 1 >>>Z 3 ! This example uses the Z command ! to connect processor 3 to the console ! Note new console program prompt 3>> T/R ! Command to enter RBD monitor program RBD3> ! RBD monitor prompt, where 3 is the hexa- ! decimal node number of the processor ! that is currently receiving your input. RBD3> START 1 /TRACE/HE ! Runs the CPU/memory RBD with trace; halt ! on error. Test results written to the ! console terminal: ;CPUMEM 6.0 ; T0001 T0002 T0003 T0004 T0005 T0006 T0007 T0008 T0009 T0010 ; T0011 T0012 T0013 T0014 T0015 T0016 T0017 T0018 T0019 T0020 ! " ; P 3 8001 1 ;000000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 RBD3> In the example above: ! P means that the diagnostic ran successfully. " One pass was completed. 3-30 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 3-5: Extended CPU/Memory Test -- RBD 1 ------------------------------------------------------------ Test Function ------------------------------------------------------------ T0001 Cache Disable test T0002 Cache Invalidate test T0003 Cache Read Fill test T0004 Interlock Instruction Cache test T0005 Longword Write WB0 test T0006 Octaword Write WB0 test T0007 WB Switch and Purge test T0008 Octaword Write WB1 test T0009 Write Buffer Read Tests T0010 Hit WB0 test T0011 Hit WB1 test T0012 WB Mask Bit Byte Tests T0013 WB Mask Bit Word Tests T0014 Intlk Read/Unlck Write WB test T0015 I/O Space Write WB test T0016 Node Private Space WB test T0017 WB Address test T0018 WB Pending Purge test T0019 Duplicate Tag Invalidate test T0020 Duplicate Tag Address test ------------------------------------------------------------ (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-31 3.8.3 Second-Level Cache Test -- RBD 4 RBD 4 tests the second-level cache. Note that no tests are run by default. Example 3-5: Second-Level Cache Test RBD 4 >>> T/R ! Command to enter RBD monitor program RBD1> ! RBD monitor prompt, where 1 is the ! hexadecimal node number of the processor ! that is currently receiving your input RBD1> ST4/T=1:2/TR ! Specifically asks for tests 1 and 2 to ! be run with trace enabled ;SLCRBD 6.0 ; T0001 ! Test 1 started ! # ; S 1 8001 1 ! Status message for test 1 ; XX SL_CACHE XX T0001 ;00000000 00040000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 ! Print message showing current ! address and ending address ; T0002 ! Test 2 started ! # ; S 1 8001 1 ! Status message for test 2 ; XX SL_CACHE XX T0002 ;00000000 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 ! Print message showing current ! address and ending address. ;00000042 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 ! Print message showing the ! number of cache hits " # ; P 1 8001 1 ;00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 RBD1> QUIT ! Exit the RBD monitor 3-32 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual ! S denotes status message for individual test. " P means that the entire diagnostic ran successfully. # One pass was completed. Table 3-6: Second-Level Cache Test -- RBD4 ------------------------------------------------------------ Test Function ------------------------------------------------------------ T0001 Parity Error Test T0002 Cache Coherency Test T0003 Cache Invalidate Test T0004 Self-Invalidate Test T0005 Invalidate/Self-Invalidate Test T0006 Self-Invalidate Scope Test T0007 Cache Ram Parity Error Test T0008 Passive Release Test ------------------------------------------------------------ (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-33 3.9 VAX/DS Diagnostics The (xyp) software diagnostics that run under the VAX Diagnostic Supervisor (VAX/DS) are listed in Table 3-7. An example follows. See Section 2.4 for instructions on running the supervisor. Table 3-7: (xyp) VAX/DS Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ Program Description ------------------------------------------------------------ EVSBA VAX Standalone Autosizer EVKAQ VAX Basic Instructions Exerciser - Part 1 EVKAR VAX Basic Instructions Exerciser - Part 2 EVKAS VAX Floating Point Instruction Exerciser - Part 1 EVKAT VAX Floating Point Instruction Exerciser - Part 2 EVKAU VAX Privileged Architecture Instruction Test - Part 1 EVKAV VAX Privileged Architecture Instruction Test - Part 2 ELKAX Manual Tests ELKMP Multiprocessor Exerciser EVUCA VAX 6000 EEPROM Update Utility ------------------------------------------------------------ Example 3-6: Running Standalone Processor Diagnostics DS> RUN EVSBA ! DS> SEL KA0 " DS> RUN ELKAX # [diagnostic messages] DS> EXIT $ 3-34 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual ! Run the standalone autosizer; then you do not need to attach devices to the supervisor explicitly. However, if you want to know the Attach command, enter HELP diagnostic_name ATTACH. " The instruction and manual tests run on the boot processor. If the boot processor is the CPU with the lowest (XMI) node number (which is usually the case), issue the command to select KA0. The Diagnostic Supervisor numbers the processors consecutively. For example, if the (xyp) module with the second-lowest (XMI) node number were boot processor, you would select KA1. # This example runs the manual tests (ELKAX), which include powerfail, machine check, restart, and EEPROM functions. The diagnostic prints messages, and you must manually intervene using console switches. $ Exit from VAX/DS. (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-35 3.10 Machine Checks A machine check is an exception that indicates a processor- detected internal error. Figure 3-8 shows the parameters that are pushed on the stack in response to a machine check. Table 3-8 lists these parameters. Figure 3-8: The Stack in Response to a Machine Check Table 3-8: Machine Check Parameters ------------------------------------------------------------ Parameter Value Description ------------------------------------------------------------ Machine check code (hex) (SP+4) 1 Floating-point protocol error 2 Floating-point reserved instruction 3 Floating-point unknown error 4 Floating-point unknown error 5 Process PTE in P0 space during TB miss flows 6 Process PTE in P1 space during TB miss flows 7 Process PTE in P0 space during M = 0 flows 3-36 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 3-8 (Cont.): Machine Check Parameters ------------------------------------------------------------ Parameter Value Description ------------------------------------------------------------ 8 Process PTE in P1 space during M = 0 flows 9 Undefined INT.ID value A Undefined MOVCx state 80 Memory read error 81 SCB, PCB, or SPTE read error 82 Memory write error 83 SCB, PCB, or SPTE write error Most recent virtual address (SP+8) <31:0> Current contents of VAP register Internal state information #1 (SP+C) <31:24> Opcode <23:16> 1110, highest priority software inter- rupt <3:0> <15:8> CADR<7:0> <7:0> MSER<7:0> Internal state information #2 (SP+10) <31:24> Most recent contents of SC register <7:0> <23:16> 11, state flags <5:0> <15:8> Restart flag, 111, ALU CC flags <3:0> <7:0> Offset from saved PC to PC at time of ma- chine check PC (SP+14) <31:0> PC at the start of the current instruc- tion PSL (SP+18) <31:0> Current contents of PSL ------------------------------------------------------------ Machine checks are taken regardless of the current IPL. During a machine check the IPL is raised to 1F and the machine check frame is pushed onto the interrupt stack. If the machine check exception vector bits (<1:0>) are not both one, the operation of the processor is undefined. (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-37 3.11 Console Commands Table 3-9 summarizes the console commands. The VAX 6000 Series Owner 's Manual gives a full description of each command, its qualifiers, and examples. Table 3-9: Console Commands ------------------------------------------------------------ Command Function ------------------------------------------------------------ BOOT Initializes the system, causing a self-test, and begins the boot program. CONTINUE Begins processing at the address where processing was inter- rupted by a CTRL/P console command. DEPOSIT Stores data in a specified address. EXAMINE Displays the contents of a specified address. FIND Searches main memory for a page-aligned 256-Kbyte block of good memory or for a restart parameter block. HALT Null command; no action is taken since the processor has al- ready halted in order to enter console mode. HELP Prints explanation of console commands. INITIALIZE Performs a system reset, including self-test. PATCH EEPROM Patches console, diagnostic, and boot primitive code from a TK70. REPEAT Executes the command passed as its argument. RESTORE EEPROM Copies, if present, the TK tape's EEPROM contents to the EEP- ROM of the processor executing the command. SAVE EEPROM Copies to the TK tape, if present, the contents of the EEP- ROM of the processor executing the command. SET BOOT Stores a boot command by a nickname. SET CPU Specifies eligibility of processors to become the boot proces- sor. SET LANGUAGE Changes the output of the console error messages between nu- meric code only (international mode) and code plus explana- tion (English mode). 3-38 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 3-9 (Cont.): Console Commands ------------------------------------------------------------ Command Function ------------------------------------------------------------ SET MEMORY Designates the method of interleaving the memory mod- ules; supersedes the console program's default interleav- ing. SET TERMINAL Sets console terminal characteristics in the EEPROM. SHOW ALL Displays the current value of parameters set. SHOW BOOT Displays all boot commands and nicknames that have been saved using SET CPU. SHOW CONFIGURATION Displays the hardware device type and revision level for each XMI and VAXBI node and indicates self-test sta- tus. SHOW CPU Displays the /ENABLED and /PRIMARY values for each node. SHOW ETHERNET Locates all Ethernet adapters on the system and dis- plays their addresses. SHOW MEMORY Displays the memory lines from the system self-test, show- ing interleave and memory size. SHOW TERMINAL Displays the baud rate and terminal characteristics function- ing on the console terminal. START Begins execution of an instruction at the address speci- fied in the command string. STOP Halts the specified node. TEST Passes control to the self-test diagnostics; /RBD qualifier in- vokes ROM-based diagnostics. UPDATE Copies contents of the EEPROM on the processor execut- ing the command to the EEPROM of the processor speci- fied in the command string. Z Logically connects the console terminal to another proces- sor on the (XMI) bus or to a VAXBI node. ! Introduces a comment. ------------------------------------------------------------ (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-39 3.12 CPU Replacement in Single CPU Systems There are two methods available to customize a processor in a single-processor system. The first uses the RESTORE command; the second sets the EEPROM by console commands. 3.12.1 Using the RESTORE Command Use the RESTORE command to customize a replaced CPU in a single-processor system. Use this method only if the ROM revision of the spare is the same as the ROM revision of the CPU being replaced. Before you begin set the terminal baud rate to 1200. Example 3-7: Replacing a Single Processor F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NODE # A . A . M M . . . . . . . P TYP & o . + . + + . . . . . . . + STF ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . B BPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . + ETF ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . B BPD . . . . . . + + . + . + . + + . XBI E + . . . . A2 A1 . . . . . . . . ILV . . . . 64 64 . . . . . . . . 128Mb ROM = 6.0 ( EEPROM = 2.0/6.0 SN = 0000000000 ) ?4E System serial number has not been initialized ) >>> RESTORE EEPROM +@ ?6D EEPROM Revision = 2.0/6.0 ?6F Tape image Revision = 2.0/6.1 Proceed with update of EEPROM? (Y or N) !optional - may need latest console/diag patches again +A >>> BOOT +C 3-40 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual 1. Turn the upper key switch straight up to the Off position (0). 2. Remove the defective CPU module. 3. Insert the new processor module. 4. Turn the lower key switch to Halt. 5. Turn the upper key switch to Enable. 6. Check the self-test display for the processor, indicated by a P on the TYP line (usually in slot 1). See Example 3-7 &. 7. If the processor shows a plus sign (+) on both the STF and ETF lines, it passed self-test. See Example 3-7 '. 8. Compare the ROM revision ( of the new processor with the ROM revision of the one you just replaced. If they are the same, continue with this procedure; otherwise use the second method described in Section 3.12.2. 9. You will see the following message: ) ?4E System serial number has not been initialized 10. Turn the lower key switch to Update. 11. Mount the TK cartridge containing the most recent saved image of the old processor 's EEPROM. 1 12. Issue the console command RESTORE EEPROM +@ to copy all areas of the EEPROM except the module-specific area to the boot processor 's EEPROM. 13. If any patches have been issued since the last save, use EVUCA to patch the EEPROM. See Section 3.15 for details. 14. Turn the lower key switch to the Auto Start position. 15. Boot the operating system +C. Booting will initialize the system and the EEPROM will be read. If the system console baud rate was not normally set at 1200, you will have to change the terminal baud rate back to its original value. ------------------------------------------------------------ 1 When the system is installed or after maintenance, customer service engineers should save the EEPROM on a TK cartridge if available. The cartridge is left in the care of the customer. Subsequently, the EEPROM might have been changed and saved several times. This would normally happen following a PATCH operation. (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-41 3.12.2 Using SET Commands When replacing the only processor module in a system that does not have a TK, you must enter console commands that customize the EEPROM. The Site Management Guide should contain this information. Before you begin set the terminal baud rate to 1200. Example 3-8: Replacing a Single Processor F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NODE # A A . . M M . . . . . . . P TYP ' + + . . + + . . . . . . . + STF ( . . . . . . . . . . . . . B BPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . + ETF ( . . . . . . . . . . . . . B BPD . . . . A2 A1 . . . . . . . . ILV . . . . 64 64 . . . . . . . . 128Mb ROM = 6.0 EEPROM = 2.0/6.0 SN = 0000000000 ?4E System serial number has not been initialized >>> ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ ESC ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ (or ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ CTRL/3 ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ ) ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ DEL ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ SET SYSTEM SERIAL ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ RET ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ +> ! Follow the prompts to set the serial number. >>> SET BOOT DEFAULT /XMI:E DU0 +? >>> SET LANGUAGE INTERNATIONAL +@ OR >>> SET LANGUAGE ENGLISH >>> SET TERMINAL /[NO]SCOPE /SPEED:9600 /[NO]BREAK +A !optional - may need latest console/diag patches +B >>> BOOT +C 3-42 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual 1. Turn the upper key switch straight up to the Off position (0). 2. Remove the defective CPU module. 3. Insert the new processor module. 4. The EEPROM on the new module has a default baud rate of 1200. Make sure your terminal is set to 1200. 5. Turn the lower key switch to Halt. 6. Turn the upper key switch to Enable. 7. Check the self-test display for the processor, indicated by a P on the TYP line. See ' in Example 3-8. 8. If the processor shows a plus sign (+) on both the STF and ETF lines, it passed self-test. See (. 9. Turn the lower key switch to Update. 10. To correct the error message, enter the SET SYSTEM SERIAL command (see +>) and follow the command prompts. The serial number should be in the Site Management Guide. If you do not find it there, look on an old self-test display or on the tape located near the bottom of the left rear cabinet upright. 11. To set up the boot alternatives, enter the SET BOOT command supplying the parameters recorded in the Site Management Guide. You might want to check these with the system manager. +? 12. Use the SET LANGUAGE command to set up the language desired.+@ 13. Use the SET TERMINAL command to set the EEPROM terminal characteristics.+A Results of the SET TERMINAL command will take effect when the system is reset. Make sure the terminal itself is set to the same characteristics. 14. Use whatever console commands are necessary to completely customize the EEPROM to the customer 's satisfaction. If any patches or boot primitives need to be selected, follow the procedure in Section 3.15. +B 15. Turn the lower key switch to the Auto Start position and boot the operating system. +C (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-43 3.13 CPU Replacement in Multiple CPU Systems In a multiprocessing system replacing a processor requires customizing the new processor into the system. If the processor being replaced is the boot processor, then a few extra steps are required. Since different CPUs can have different ROM and EEPROM revisions in the same system, updating the EEPROM of any processor should be done using SET commands and EVUCA. Example 3-9: Retrieving EEPROM Information F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NODE # A A A . M M M M . . P P P P TYP ' + + + . + + + + . . + + + + STF ( . . . . . . . . . . E E E B BPD . . . . . . . . . . + + + + ETF ( . . . . . . . . . . E E E B BPD . . . . A4 A3 A2 A1 . . . . . . ILV . . . . 128 128 128 128 . . . . . . 512Mb ROM = 6.0 EEPROM = 2.0/6.0 SN = 0000000000 or SGO1234567 ?4F System serial number not initialized on primary processor. +> or ?2D For Secondary Processor 3 ?59 System serial number mismatch. Secondary processor has xxxxxxx >>> SET CPU 3 +? >>> ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ ESC ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ (or ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ CTRL/3 ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ ) ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ DEL ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ SHOW SYSTEM SERIAL +@ >>> SHOW ALL +A [System configuration and customization information prints] 3-44 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual 1. Turn the upper key switch straight up to the Off position (0). 2. Remove the defective CPU module. 3. Insert the new processor module. 4. If the processor you are replacing is the first processor on the right (usually in slot one), the console will make it the boot processor. If this is the case, make sure that the console terminal baud rate is 1200, the default baud rate of the spare. 5. Turn the lower key switch to Halt. 6. Turn the upper key switch to Enable. 7. Check the self-test display for the processor, indicated by a P on the TYP line. See ' in Example 3-9. 8. If the processor shows a plus sign (+) on both the STF and ETF lines, it passed self-test. ( 9. Turn the lower key switch to Update. 10. You will see either the ?4F message or the ?2D and ?59 messages.+> If you see mismatch messages, you may have to patch the EEPROM using EVUCA. See Section 3.15. If you see the ?4F message, the boot processor has been replaced and you must execute the next step; otherwise, go to Step 12. 11. Issue the SET CPU n command so that the console is connected to a processor that has been in the system for some time. +? 12. Get the system serial number by entering the SHOW SYSTEM SERIAL command. +@ 13. Issue the SHOW ALL command to get the customized boot parameters, interleave characteristics, terminal setup, and any other parameters. +A (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-45 If you collected the necessary information, you are now ready to customize the EEPROM. Example 3-10: Customizing an EEPROM >>> SET CPU 3 +B >>> ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ ESC ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ (or ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ CTRL/3 ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ ) ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ DEL ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ SET SYSTEM SERIAL +C ! Follow the prompts to set the serial number. >>> SET BOOT DEFAULT /XMI:E DU0 +D >>> SET LANGUAGE INTERNATIONAL or ENGLISH +E >>> SET TERMINAL /[NO]SCOPE /SPEED:9600 /[NO]BREAK +F >>> SET CPU/NOPRIMARY 3 +G !optional - may need latest console/diag patches again ,> >>> BOOT ,? 3-46 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual 14. Issue the SET CPU n command to connect the console to the primary or secondary processor you just replaced. +B 15. Issue the SET SYSTEM SERIAL +C and follow the prompts to correct the error message +>. 16. Use the SET BOOT command supplying the parameters displayed by the SHOW ALL command to set up the boot alternatives. +D 17. Use the SET LANGUAGE command to set the language desired. +E 18. Use the SET TERMINAL command to set the EEPROM terminal characteristics. These characteristics take effect when the system is initialized and the EEPROM is read again. Make sure the terminal is set to the same characteristics. +F 19. If the CPU you are working on has been designated as ineligible to be the boot processor, use the SET CPU/NOPRIMARY command to set its EEPROM correctly. +G 20. If any patches or boot primitives need to be selected, follow the procedure in Section 3.15. ,> 21. Turn the lower key switch to the Auto Start position and boot the operating system. ,? (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-47 3.14 How to Add a New Processor Add a new processor in a slot to the left of the boot processor so it will be a secondary processor at power-up. This procedure is similar to that described in Section 3.13. Example 3-11: Adding a Processor F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NODE # A A A . M M M M . . P P P P TYP % + + + . + + + + . . + + + + STF & . . . . . . . . . . E E E B BPD . . . . . . . . . . + + + + ETF & . . . . . . . . . . E E E B BPD . . . . A4 A3 A2 A1 . . . . . . ILV . . . . 128 128 128 128 . . . . . . 512Mb ROM = 6.0 EEPROM = 2.0/6.0 SN = SGO1234567 ?2D For Secondary Processor 3 ( ?59 System serial number mismatch. Secondary processor has xxxxxxx >>> SHOW ALL ) [System configuration and customization information prints] >>> SET CPU 4 +> ! the node number of the CPU you added >>> ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ ESC ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ (or ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ CTRL/3 ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ ) ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ DEL ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ SET SYSTEM SERIAL +? >>> SET BOOT DEFAULT /XMI:E/ DU0 +@ >>> SET LANGUAGE INTERNATIONAL or ENGLISH +A >>> SET TERMINAL /[NO]SCOPE /SPEED:9600 /[NO]BREAK +B >>> SET CPU/NOPRIMARY +C !optional - may need latest console/diag patches again +D >>> BOOT +E 3-48 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual 1. Turn the upper key switch straight up to the Off position (0). 2. Insert the new processor module to the left of the boot processor. 3. Turn the lower key switch to Halt. 4. Turn the upper key switch to Enable. 5. Check the self-test display for the processor, indicated by a P on the TYP line. See % in Example 3-11. 6. If the processor shows a plus sign (+) on both the STF and ETF lines, it passed self-test. & 7. Turn the lower key switch to Update. 8. You will see the ?2D and ?59 messages. ( In addition, you may see messages indicating that you need to patch the EEPROM. Should you need to do so, see Section 3.15. 9. Type SHOW ALL to get the customized boot parameters, interleave characteristics, terminal setup, and any other parameters. ) 10. Connect the console to the CPU you just added with the SET CPU n command. +> 11. Issue the SET SYSTEM SERIAL command +? and follow the prompts to correct the error message. 12. Issue the SET BOOT command supplying the parameters displayed by the SHOW ALL command to set up the boot alternatives. +@ 13. Issue the SET LANGUAGE command to set the language desired.+A 14. Issue the SET TERMINAL command to set the EEPROM terminal characteristics. +B 15. Use the SET CPU/NOPRIMARY command if the customer does not want this particular CPU to become the primary for some reason. +C 16. If any patches or boot primitives need to be selected, follow the procedure in Section 3.15. +D 17. Turn the lower key switch to the Auto Start position and boot the operating system. +E (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-49 3.15 Patching the EEPROM with EVUCA To update the console and diagnostic ROMs on all VAX 6000 systems, use EVUCA under the Diagnostic Supervisor in standalone mode. Example 3-12: Patching the EEPROM with EVUCA -- Part 1 >>> BOOT /XMI:A /R5:110 EX0 # [self-test display prints] Filename: ISL_LVAX Follow Prompts [Diagnostic Supervisor banner] DS> LOAD EVUCA $ DS> ATTACH KA62B HUB KA0 1 % DS> ATTACH KA62B HUB KA1 2 DS> ATTACH KA62B HUB KA2 5 DS> ATTACH KA62B HUB KA3 6 DS> SELECT ALL & DS> SET TRACE DS> START .. Program: EVUCA - VAX 6000 EEPROM Update Utility, revision 1.0, 5 tests, Testing: _KA0 _KA1 _KA2 _KA3 Booting secondary CPU 02. Booting secondary CPU 05. Booting secondary CPU 06. Test 2: Load data from media Data file? ' Searching for data file... Data file loaded. Looking for patch for CPU 01 - ROM 06.00 EEPROM 06.00 No patch image was found for CPU 01 - ROM 06.00 EEPROM 06.00 ( Looking for patch for CPU 02 - ROM 06.00 EEPROM 06.00 No patch image was found for CPU 02 - ROM 06.00 EEPROM 06.00 Looking for patch for CPU 05 - ROM 04.10 EEPROM 04.10 Patch image is revision 04.60 Do you really want to apply this patch [(No), Yes] YES ) Looking for patch for CPU 06 - ROM 04.10 EEPROM 04.60 Patch image is revision 04.60 Do you really want to apply this patch [(No), Yes] Test 3: Determine Typecode Updated +> 3-50 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual 1. Turn the lower key switch to Update. 2. Load the latest diagnostic CD in the CD drive. The CD is labeled 6000_ DIAG_x where x is a letter revision. 3. Boot the VAX Diagnostic Supervisor from the CD server using a command similar to that shown in Example 3-12 (see #). Alternatively, you could boot the supervisor from some other disk, perform the appropriate ATTACH commands, and then use the VAX/DS command SET LOAD to load EVUCA from the CD server. If you have already copied the latest diagnostics to a local disk, run EVUCA from there. 4. At the DS> prompt, type LOAD EVUCA (see $ in Example 3-12). 5. Issue the ATTACH command similar to that shown by % to enable VAX/DS access to the CPUs on the system. 6. The CPUs are selected, TRACE is set, and EVUCA is started (see &). 7. Test 2 of EVUCA selects the correct patch file for the system being patched '. A carriage return is the appropriate response. (Test 1 is for Manufacturing Automated Verification System use.) 8. After loading the file, EVUCA identifies the ROM and EEPROM revisions of each CPU in the system and reports whether there is a patch for that revision. CPUs at nodes 1 and 2 ( have no patches. 9. When a patch is found, EVUCA asks the operator whether the patch should be applied. For CPU 05 the patch image found is 4.60 and the EEPROM rev. is 4.10 (see )). A "yes" response is given. For CPU 06 the patch revision is 4.60 and the EEPROM revision is 4.60. Therefore, the choice is made not to patch this EEPROM. 10. Test 3 determines what sections of the EEPROM need updating (see +>). (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-51 Example 3-13: Patching the EEPROM with EVUCA -- Part 2 Test 4: Update EEPROM data +A Getting selectable boot primitives for CPU 05, ROM 04.10 [I/O device types in system identified] [Boot primitives available identified] Available boot primitive space is 27F4 Please enter what boot primitive to delete by number. [1-3(D)] 2 Boot primitives fit into allotted EEPROM area. Secondary CPUs are being updated, please wait a maximum of 20 seconds. +B Updating CPU 05 Test 5: Show Boot primitives ROM boot primitives for CPU 01, revision 06.00 are: 1 This boot primitive supports the following: - boot primitive designation DI - boot primitive designation MI - boot primitive designation CI Device CIBCA, device type 0108 +C Device KFMSA, device type 0810 Device CIXCD, device type 0C05 . . . [Messages about retrieving secondary CPU boot primitives] CPU 02 has the same console revision as node 01. +D Boot primitives are the same for these CPUs. ROM boot primitives for CPU 05 are: 1 This boot primitive supports the following: - boot primitive designation CI +E 2 This boot primitive supports the following: - boot primitive designation DU . . . EEPROM boot primitives for CPU 05 are: 1 This boot primitive supports the following: - boot primitive designation ET . . . CPU 06 has the same console revision as node 05. Boot primitives are the same for these CPUs. Example 3-13 Cont'd on next page 3-52 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Example 3-13 (Cont.): Patching the EEPROM with EVUCA -- Part 2 The primary CPU was not updated. Secondary CPU 05, was successfully updated. Current ROM and EEPROM revisions for each CPU are: [ROM revisions and EEPROM revisions summarized for each CPU] +F .. End of run, 0 errors detected, pass count is 1, time is 1-JAN-1991 17:06:57.88 DS> 13. Test 4 creates a new updated EEPROM image in memory (see +A). Several boot primitives are available. Those that are permanent reside in ROM; those that are selectable or are patched reside in the EEPROM. If all boot primitives fit, EVUCA will not go through a selection process. However, if all primitives do not fit, the user is shown all the boot primitives available and prompted to choose which primitive is not wanted. If enough space is available, EVUCA will continue. If enough space is not available, the user must choose another unwanted primitive. This process continues until space is available for the remaining primitives. 14. Once the primitives fit, the EEPROMs are updated and the message noted by +B is printed. 15. Later ROM revisions identify both what boot primitives are available and what devices they support (see +C). 16. CPU 2 and CPU 1 have the same ROM revision and have the same boot primitives +D. 17. CPU 5 has been patched, and test 5 shows the primitives in ROM followed by those in EEPROM (See +E in Example 3-13). Since the ROM is an older revision, the devices the primitives support are not printed. 18. A final list of current ROM and EEPROM revisions is printed +F. (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-53 3.16 (XYP) Registers The (xyp) registers consist of the processor status longword, internal processor registers, (xyp) registers in (XMI) private space, (XMI) required registers, and 16 general purpose reg- isters. Table 3-10: (xyp) Internal Processor Registers ------------------------------------------------------------ Register Mnemonic Address Type Class ------------------------------------------------------------ Kernel Stack Pointer KSP IPR0 R/W 1 Executive Stack Pointer ESP IPR1 R/W 1 Supervisor Stack Pointer SSP IPR2 R/W 1 User Stack Pointer USP IPR3 R/W 1 Interrupt Stack Pointer ISP IPR4 R/W 1 Reserved IPR5-IPR7 3 P0 Base Register P0BR IPR8 R/W 1 P0 Length Register P0LR IPR9 R/W 1 P1 Base Register P1BR IPR10 R/W 1 P1 Length Register P1LR IPR11 R/W 1 ------------------------------------------------------------ Key to Types: R-Read W-Write R/W-Read/write Key to Classes: 1-Implemented by the (xyp), specified in the VAX Architecture Refer- ence Manual. 2-Implemented uniquely by the (xyp). 3-Not implemented. Read as zero; NOP on write. 4-Access not allowed; accesses result in a reserved operand fault. 5-Accessible, but not fully implemented; accesses yield UNPREDICTABLE results. n I-The register is initialized on (xyp) reset (power-up, system re- set, and node reset). 3-54 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 3-10 (Cont.): (xyp) Internal Processor Reg- isters ------------------------------------------------------------ Register Mnemonic Address Type Class ------------------------------------------------------------ System Base Register SBR IPR12 R/W 1 System Length Register SLR IPR13 R/W 1 Reserved IPR14-IPR15 3 Process Control Block Base PCBB IPR16 R/W 1 System Control Block Base SCBB IPR17 R/W 1 Interrupt Priority Level IPL IPR18 R/W 1 I AST Level ASTLVL IPR19 R/W 1 I Software Interrupt Request SIRR IPR20 W 1 Software Interrupt Summary SISR IPR21 R/W 1 I Reserved IPR22-IPR23 3 Interval Clock Control/Status ICCS IPR24 R/W 2 I Next Interval Count NICR IPR25 W 3 Interval Count ICR IPR26 R 3 Time-of-Year Clock TODR IPR27 R/W 1 Console Storage Receiver Status CSRS IPR28 R/W 5 I Console Storage Receiver Data CSRD IPR29 R 5 I Console Storage Transmitter Status CSTS IPR30 R/W 5 I Console Storage Transmitter Data CSTD IPR31 W 5 I Console Receiver Control/Status RXCS IPR32 R/W 2 I Console Receiver Data Buffer RXDB IPR33 R 2 I Console Transmit Control/Status TXCS IPR34 W 2 I Console Transmit Data Buffer TXDB IPR35 W 2 I Translation Buffer Disable TBDR IPR36 R/W 3 Cache Disable CADR IPR37 R/W 2 I Machine Check Error Summary MCESR IPR38 R/W 3 Memory System Error MSER IPR39 R/W 2 I Reserved IPR40-IPR41 3 (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-55 Table 3-10 (Cont.): (xyp) Internal Processor Reg- isters ------------------------------------------------------------ Register Mnemonic Address Type Class ------------------------------------------------------------ Console Saved PC SAVPC IPR42 R 2 Console Saved PSL SAVPSL IPR43 R 2 Reserved IPR44-IPR47 3 SBI Fault/Status SBIFS IPR48 R/W 3 SBI Silo SBIS IPR49 R 3 SBI Silo Comparator SBISC IPR50 R/W 3 SBI Maintenance SBIMT IPR51 R/W 3 SBI Error SBIER IPR52 R/W 3 SBI Timeout Address SBITA IPR53 R 3 SBI Quadword Clear SBIQC IPR54 W 3 I/O Bus Reset IORESET IPR55 W 2 Memory Management Enable MAPEN IPR56 R/W 1 Translation Buffer Invalidate All TBIA IPR57 W 1 Translation Buffer Invalidate Single TBIS IPR58 W 1 Translation Buffer Data TBDATA IPR59 R/W 3 Microprogam Break MBRK IPR60 R/W 3 Performance Monitor Enable PMR IPR61 R/W 3 System Identification SID IPR62 R 1 Translation Buffer Check TBCHK IPR63 W 1 Reserved IPR64-IPR127 4 ------------------------------------------------------------ The IPRs are explicitly accessible to software only by the Move To Processor Register (MTPR) and Move From Processor Register (MFPR) instructions, which require kernel mode privileges. From the console, EXAMINE/I and DEPOSIT/I commands read and write the IPRs. 3-56 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 3-11: (XMI) Registers for the the (xyp) ------------------------------------------------------------ Register Mnemonic Address ------------------------------------------------------------ XMI Device XDEV BB + 00 XMI Bus Error XBER BB + 04 XMI Failing Address XFADR BB + 08 XMI XGPR XGPR BB + 0C KA62B Control/Status #2 CSR2 BB + 10 ------------------------------------------------------------ Note: "BB" = base address of a node, which is the address of the first location in nodespace. (xyp) Scalar Processor 3-57 Table 3-12: (xyp) Registers in (XMI) Private Space ------------------------------------------------------------ Register Mnemonic Address ------------------------------------------------------------ KA62B Control/Status #1 CSR1 2000 0000 KA62B ROM ROM 2004 0000 to 2007 FFFF KA62B EEPROM EEPROM 2008 0000 to 2008 7FFF SSC Base Address SSCBR 2014 0000 SSC Configuration SSCCR 2014 0010 CDAL Bus Timeout CBTCR 2014 0020 Console Select CONSEL 2014 0030 Timer Control Register 0 TCR0 2014 0100 Timer Interval Register 0 TIR0 2014 0104 Timer Next Interval Register 0 TNIR0 2014 0108 Timer Interrupt Vector Register 0 TIVR0 2014 010C Timer Control Register 1 TCR1 2014 0110 Timer Interval Register 1 TIR1 2014 0114 Timer Next Interval Register 1 TNIR1 2014 0118 Timer Interrupt Vector Register 1 TIVR1 2014 011C CSR1 Base Address CSR1BADR 2014 0130 CSR1 Address Decode Mask CSR1ADMR 2014 0134 EEPROM Base Address EEBADR 2014 0140 EEPROM Address Decode Mask EEADMR 2014 0144 SSC BBU RAM BBURAM 2014 0400 to 2014 07FF IP IVINTR Generation IPIVINTRGEN 2101 0000 to 2101 FFFF WE IVINTR Generation WEIVINTRGEN 2102 0000 to 2102 FFFF ------------------------------------------------------------ 3-58 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Chapter 4 (XRP) Scalar Processor ------------------------------------------------------------ This chapter contains the following sections: · (XRP) Physical Description and Specifications · (XRP) Configuration Rules · (XRP) Functional Description · Boot Processor · Power-Up Sequence · (XRP) Self-Test Results: Console Display · (XRP) Self-Test Results: Module LEDs · (XRP) Self-Test Results: XGPR Register · ROM-Based Diagnostics (XRP) Self-Test -- RBD 0 CPU/Memory Interaction Tests -- RBD 1 · VAX/DS Diagnostics · Machine Checks · Console Commands · (XRP) Handling Procedures · CPU Replacement in Single CPU System Using the RESTORE Command Using SET commands · CPU Replacement in Multiple CPU Systems · How to Add a New Processor · Patching the EEPROM with EVUCA · (XRP) Registers (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-1 4.1 (XRP) Physical Description and Specifications The (XRP) is a single-module VAX processor. The module designation is T2015. (rigel) sys- tems can include up to six (XRP) processors, which use the 100 Mbyte/second (XMI) sys- tem bus to communicate with memory. Features of the mod- ule are shown in Figure 4-1. Figure 4-1: (XRP) Module 4-2 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 4-1: (XRP) Specifications ------------------------------------------------------------ Parameter Description ------------------------------------------------------------ Module Number: T2015 Dimensions: 23.3 cm (9.2") H x 0.6 cm (0.25") W x 28.0 cm (11.0") D Temperature: Storage Range -40 o C to 66 o C (-40 o F to 151 o F) Operating Range 5 o C to 50 o C (41 o F to 122 o F) Relative Humidity: Storage 10% to 95% noncondensing Operating 10% to 95% noncondensing Altitude: Storage Up to 4.8 km (16,000 ft) Operating Up to 2.4 km (8000 ft) Current: 8.2A at +5V Power: 41W Cables: Optional VIB for vector, 17-02240-03 Diagnostics: ROM-based diagnostics (0 and 1) VAX/DS diagnostics, see Section 4.11. ------------------------------------------------------------ (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-3 4.2 (XRP) Configuration Rules (XRP) modules will operate in any slot of the XMI card cage; however, processors usually go on the right, beginning with slot 1. Special rules apply if the KA64A has an attached vector processor; see Section 5.3. Figure 4-2: Typical (XRP) Configuration 4-4 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual By convention, processors are placed in the right (XMI) slots, beginning with slot 1 and extending to slot 6. Memories are placed in the middle slots, from slot A to slot 5 and then slots B and C, and VAXBI adapters are installed in the left side of the card cage, beginning with slot E. An attached vector processor must be in the slot to the left of the (XRP) module. The slot to the left of the vector processor can be used only for a memory module. Installing another kind of module can damage the vector module. A second scalar, vector, memory trio may be placed next to the first. See Section 5.3 for a discussion of configuration rules related to scalar/vector pairs. For performance reasons, the scalar processor of a scalar/vector pair should not be made the primary processor when other scalar processors are in the system. (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-5 4.3 KA64A Functional Description The (XRP) processor has four functional sections (see Figure 4-3): the CPU section, the backup cache, the XMI interface, and the console and diagnostics sections. Figure 4-3: (XRP) Block Diagram 4-6 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual The CPU section includes: · The processor chip, which supports the VAX Base Instruction Group and data types. It contains a 64-entry, fully associative translation buffer for both process and system-space mappings. The processor chip includes a 2-Kbyte, direct-mapped, write-through instruction and data cache with a quadword block and fill size. · A floating-point accelerator chip that enhances the computation phase of floating-point and some integer instructions. This chip receives operands from the processor chip, computes the result, and passes the result and status back to the processor chip to complete the instruction. The backup cache is a 128-Kbyte, direct-mapped, write-through instruction and data cache. It is implemented in 24 16-Kbyte x 4 data RAMs. The backup cache contains 2-Kbyte tags, organized to provide an octaword fill size and a 4-octaword block size. The (XMI) interface includes: · An octaword write buffer that decreases bus and memory controller bandwidth needs by packing writes into larger, more efficient blocks prior to sending them to main memory. · Cache fill logic that loads the backup cache with four octawords of data on each cache miss. · (XMI) write monitoring logic that uses a duplicate tag store to detect when another (XMI) node writes a memory location that is cached on this processor. Then the XMI interface chips invalidate the corresponding entry in the backup cache. · Full set of error recovery and logging capabilities. (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-7 Example 4-1: ROM and EEPROM Version Numbers #123456789 0123456789 0123456789 01234567# F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NODE # A A . . M M M M . . P P P P TYP o + . . + + + + . . + + + + STF . . . . . . . . . . E E E B BPD . . . . . . . . . . + + + + ETF . . . . . . . . . . E E E B BPD . . . . . . + + . + . + . + + . XBI E + . . . . A4 A3 A2 A1 . . . . . . ILV . . . . 64 64 64 64 . . . . . . 256Mb ROM0 = V3.00! ROM1 = V3.00" EEPROM = 2.03/3.00# SN = SG01234567$ 4-8 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual The console and diagnostics sections include: · A console read-only memory (ROM), which contains the code for initialization, executing console commands, and bootstrapping the system. The last line of the self-test display shows the ROM version. In this example callout ! indicates that the console ROM, ROM0, is version V3.00. · A diagnostic ROM, ROM1, which contains the power-up self-test and extended diagnostics. The diagnostic ROM has the same version number as the console ROM. In this example callout " indicates that the diagnostic ROM is version V3.00. · An electrically-erasable, programmable ROM (EEPROM), which contains system parameters and boot code. You can modify the parameters with the console SET commands. Patching console and diagnostic code in the ROMs is done by reading the patches into a special area of the EEPROM. The recommended procedure is described in Section 4.18. The last line of the self-test display shows two EEPROM version numbers. The first number # indicates the format version of the EEPROM. This version is changed only when the internal structure of the EEPROM is modified. The second number $ is the revision of ROM patches that have been applied to the EEPROM. The major number in this revision (before the decimal point) corresponds to the major number of the ROM revision !. The minor number indicates the actual patch revision. In this example, the EEPROM has not been patched for console ROM V3.00. · A system support chip (RSSC) that includes support for external ROM/ EEPROM, 1 Kbyte of battery-backed-up RAM, console terminal UARTs, bus reset logic, interval timer, programmable timers, time-of-year (TOY) clock, bus timeout, and halt arbitration logic. (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-9 4.4 Boot Processor All (XRP) processors share system resources equally. The processor controlling the console at any given time is designated as the primary or boot processor. The others are called secondary processors. The boot processor is selected during the power-up sequence. Figure 4-4: Selection of Boot Processor 4-10 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Using boot code stored in its EEPROM, the boot processor reads the boot block from a specified device. Booting may be triggered by a command issued to the boot processor from the console, or by a system reset with the bottom key switch in the Auto Start position. The boot processor also communicates with the system console, using the common console lines on the backplane. When you change system parameters in the EEPROM using SET commands, the boot processor automatically copies the new values to the EEPROMs on the secondary processors. If you swap in a new (XRP) module, it should be configured as a secondary processor. Then you can either use the UPDATE command to copy the boot processor 's entire EEPROM to the new secondary or use EVUCA and a series of set commands to customize the EEPROM. Since UPDATE is slow, and can, in certain instances, render a processor unusable, the preferred method of updating a new processor placed in a system is to do it using SET commands. See Section 4.18 for information on running EVUCA and Section 4.15.2 on setting parameters. CAUTION: Using UPDATE can be dangerous because of revision mismatches. See Appendix C for information on what happens in mismatch cases. Usually the processor with the lowest (XMI) node number (which is also the lowest slot number) is selected as the boot processor. However, if this processor does not pass all its power-up tests, the next higher-numbered processor is selected. This is one way the boot processor can change. The user also has control over boot processor selection with the SET CPU command. This command may declare a processor ineligible for selection. SET CPU can also select a boot processor explicitly. You can see the boot processor selection three ways: · In the self-test display, the boot processor is indicated by a B on the second line labeled BPD. · In console mode, the command SHOW CPU displays the boot processor as "Current primary." See Section 4.7. · The bottom red LED is off on the boot processor module. It is lit on secondary processors. (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-11 4.5 Power-Up Sequence Figure 4-5 shows the power-up sequence for (XRP) processors. All processors execute two phases of self-test, and a boot processor is selected. The boot processor tests the VAXBI adapters, if present, and prints the self-test dis- play. 4-12 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Figure 4-5: (XRP) Power-Up Sequence, Part 1 of 2 (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-13 ! All CPUs execute their on-board self-tests at the beginning of the power- up tests. On the STF line of the self-test display, a plus sign (+) is shown for every module whose self-test passes (see Section 4.6). " The boot processor is determined as described in Section 4.4. On the first BPD line, the letter B corresponds to the processor selected as boot processor. Because the processors have not yet completed their power-up tests, the designated processor may later be disqualified from being boot processor. For this reason, the BPD line appears twice in the self-test display. # The boot processor tests all memory modules, and then prints the results of self-test, lines NODE, TYP, STF, and BPD on the self-test display. The boot processor then signals all CPUs to start running the extended test. $ All CPUs execute an extended test using the memories. On the ETF line of the self-test display, a plus sign (+) is shown for every module that passes extended test. % If all CPUs pass the extended test, the original boot processor selection is still valid. Lines STF and ETF would be identical for all the processors. The yellow LED and the top red LED are lit on all processor modules that pass both power-up tests. On the secondary processors, the bottom red LED is also lit. On the boot processor, this red LED is off (see Figure 4-7). If the original boot processor fails the extended test (indicated by a minus sign (-) on line ETF), a new boot processor is selected. On the second BPD line, the letter B corresponds to the processor finally selected as boot processor. 4-14 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Figure 4-6: (XRP) Power-Up Sequence, Part 2 of 2 4-16 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual & The boot processor prints the ETF line and the second BPD line of the self-test display. If none of the processors is successfully selected as the boot processor, no self-test results are displayed and the console hangs. You can identify this hung state by examining the LEDs on the processor modules (see Section 4.7). All yellow LEDs will be OFF. The group of seven red LEDS indicate the failing test number in binary- coded decimal. You can force a processor to become the boot processor so that it will display self-test results by typing the following: >>n where n is the CPU to become the boot processor. ' The boot processor tests the DWMBB if one is present. Test results are indicated on the line labeled XBI on the self-test display. A plus sign (+) at the right means that the adapter test passed; a minus sign (-) means that the test failed. (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-17 4.6 (XRP) Self-Test Results: Console Display You can check (XRP) self-test results in three ways: the self-test display, the lights on the module, and the contents of the XGPR register. Pertinent information in the self-test display is shown in Example 4-2. See Chapter 6 for information on vector processors. Example 4-2: Self-Test Results #123456789 0123456789 0123456789 01234567#! F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NODE # A A . . M M M M . . P P P P TYP" o + . . + + + + . . + + + + STF# . . . . . . . . . . E E D B BPD$ . . . . . . . . . . + + + - ETF% . . . . . . . . . . E B D E BPD& . . . . . . + + . + . + . + + . XBI E + . . . . A4 A3 A2 A1 . . . . . . ILV . . . . 128 128 128 128 . . . . . . 512Mb ROM0 = V3.00 ROM1 = V3.00 EEPROM = 2.03/3.00 SN = SG01234567' >>> ! The first line of the self-test printout is the progress trace. This line prints if a (XRP) module is in slot 1. The progress trace has two purposes: to give a visual indication that the system is functioning during self-test, and, if self-test fails, to display the failing test number. The numbers correspond to the 37 tests in the (XRP) self-test. When self-test passes, the line prints as in Example 4-2. If a test fails, the failing test number is the last one printed. For example, if test 14 fails, the line is printed as follows: #123456789 01234 4-18 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual " This line indicates the type (TYP) of module at each (XMI) node. Processors are type P found at nodes 1, 2, 3, and 4 in this exam- ple. # This line shows self-test fail status (STF), which are the results of on- board self-test. Possible values for processors are: + (pass) - (fail) All processors passed self-test in this example. $ The BPD line indicates boot processor designation. When the system completes on-board self-test, the processor with the lowest XMI ID number that passes self-test and is eligible is selected as boot processor -- in this example, the processor at node 1. The results on the BPD line indicate: · B -- The boot processor · E -- Processors eligible to become the boot processor · D -- Processors ineligible to become the boot processor % During extended test (ETF) all processors run additional tests, which include reading and writing memory and using the cache. On line ETF, results are reported for each processor in the same way as on line STF -- a plus sign indicates that extended test passed and a minus sign that extended test failed. In this example, the processor at node 1 (originally selected boot processor) failed the CPU/memory interaction tests. & Another BPD line is displayed, because it is possible for a different CPU to be designated boot processor before the system actually boots. This occurs in this example, because the processor at node 1 failed the extended test. The lowest-numbered processor that passed both tests is the processor at node 2. However, a previous SET CPU/ NOPRIMARY command has made this processor ineligible to be boot processor (indicated by the designation D on the BPD line). Therefore, the processor at node 3 is designated boot processor. ' The bottom line of the self-test display shows the ROM and EEPROM version numbers and the system serial number. A (XRP) performs additional tests on an attached FV64A vector module (see Section 5.5). (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-19 4.7 (XRP) Self-Test Results: Module LEDs You can check (XRP) self-test results in the self-test display, in the lights on the module, or in the XGPR register. If self-test passes, the large yellow LED is on. Figure 4-7: (XRP) LEDs After Power-Up Self-Test 4-20 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual If self-test passes, the large yellow LED at the top of the LEDs is ON. (Here self-test means both the on-board power-up tests, RBD 0, and the CPU/ memory interaction tests, RBD 1.) The top red LED (next to the yellow one) is also ON, and the next five red LEDs are OFF. The bottom LED is OFF if the processor is the boot processor, and ON if it is a secondary processor. If self-test fails, the yellow LED is OFF, and the red LEDs contain an error code that corresponds to the number of the failing test. The test number is represented in binary-coded decimal. In the seven red error LEDs, the most significant bit is at the top, but the lights have a reverse interpretation -- a bit is ONE if the light is OFF. For example, assume a processor fails self-test (yellow LED is OFF) and shows the following pattern in its seven red LEDs: TOP (MSB) on 0 off 1 = 3 off 1 on 0 on 0 = 2 off 1 on 0 BOTTOM The failing test number decodes to 011 0010 (binary-coded decimal 32). If you then ran RBD 0 with the /TR and /HE qualifiers, the last test number you would see displayed is T0032. When any of the red error LEDs is lit, a failure has occurred during the self-test sequence. But system power-up self-test actually comprises three sets of tests: (XRP) power-up tests (RBD 0), CPU/memory interaction tests (RBD 1), and VAXBI adapter (DWMBB) tests (RBD 2). Interpretation of the processor board error lights depends on which set of tests was running, as explained below and in Table 4-2. (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-21 Processor error LEDs can also indicate failures of memories or VAXBI adapters. Table 4-2: (XRP) Error LEDs ------------------------------------------------------------ Yellow LED Red LEDs (Binary- coded decimal) Diagnostic and Test Number Device Failing Self-Test Line ------------------------------------------------------------ OFF 1-37  Power-up self-test (RBD 0) T0001-T0037 See Table 4-6. (XRP)STF OFF 50-62  CPU/memory test - Memory 1 (RBD 1) T0001-T0013 See Table 4-7. KA64A or MS65A 1 (module with low- est XMI node num- ber) ETF OFF 67 CPU/memory test - Memory 2 T0003 (equivalent to ST1/T=3) MS65A 2 ETF OFF 68 CPU/memory test - Memory 3 T0003 (equivalent to ST1/T=3) MS65A 3 ETF OFF 69 CPU/memory test - Memory 4 T0003 (equivalent to ST1/T=3) MS65A 4 ETF OFF 70 CPU/memory test - Memory 5 T0003 (equivalent to ST1/T=3) MS65A 5 ETF OFF 71 CPU/memory test - Memory 6 T0003 (equivalent to ST1/T=3) MS65A 6 ETF OFF 72 CPU/memory test - Memory 7 T0003 (equivalent to ST1/T=3) MS65A 7 ETF OFF 73 CPU/memory test - Memory 8 T0003 (equivalent to ST1/T=3) MS65A 8 ETF ON 1-26 DWMBB test (RBD 2) T0001-T0026 See Table 7-5. DWMBB XBI ------------------------------------------------------------  Applies to scalar-only configuration. When a vector module is attached to a KA64A, the power-up tests are 1-49, and the CPU/memory tests are 50-66. Table 4-6 lists these tests. ------------------------------------------------------------ 4-22 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual If a processor 's yellow LED is OFF and the red LEDs show an error code in the range 1-37, the power-up self-test failed and the processor board is bad. On the self-test console display, the processor shows a minus sign (-) on the STF line. After the power-up tests, each processor runs the CPU/memory interaction tests. If a test fails, the processor shows a minus sign (-) on the ETF line of the self-test console display. The LED error codes are numbered from 50 to 62, which is the failing test number (1 through 13) plus 49, the number of tests in RBD 0. For example, assume that a processor fails self-test (yellow LED is OFF) and shows the following pattern in the error LEDs: TOP (MSB) off 1 on 0 = 5 off 1 on 0 off 1 = 6 off 1 on 0 BOTTOM The failing test number decodes to 101 0110 (binary-coded decimal 56), which corresponds to the seventh CPU/memory interaction test ((56-49 = 7).) If you then run RBD 1 with the /TR and /HE qualifiers, the last test number you see displayed is T0007. Each processor, after testing with the first memory, runs the CPU/memory interaction tests on every other good memory module. (However, only CPU/ memory interaction test T0003 is run.) If a failure occurs, the memory module is probably bad, although the processor 's yellow light is OFF and the memory module's yellow light is ON. If several processors fail on the same memory, the memory is certainly bad. Try using SET MEMORY to configure the bad module out of the interleave set. For error codes higher than 66, consult Table 4-2 to determine the failing memory. The last series is the DWMBB tests. If one fails, the red LEDs contain an error code, although the processor 's yellow self-test LED is ON (because the CPU itself has passed). The failing test numbers are listed in Table 7-5. Note that only the boot processor performs the DWMBB tests. (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-23 4.8 (XRP) Self-Test Results: XGPR Register When a (XRP) failure occurs during power- up and the failing test number cannot be found in the module LEDs and RBDs cannot be run, you can examine the XGPR register. The failing test number is left in the upper byte of the XGPR register of the failing (XRP) processor or of the boot processor if a memory or DWMBB module fails. Example 4-3: XGPR Register After Power-Up Test Failure >>> E/P/L 2190000C ! Examine the longword at physical address ! 2190000C, the address of the XGPR 2190000C 30xxxxxx ! register of the (XRP) processor in slot 2. ! The result indicates that test 30 of the ! (XRP) self-test failed. See Table 4-4 ! to interpret the data returned. >>> E/P/L 2188000C ! Examine the XGPR register of the (XRP) ! processor in slot 1. Derivation of the ! address is explained below. 2188000C 49xxxxxx ! CPU/memory interaction test 12 failed. >>> E/P/L 2188000C ! Examine the XGPR register of the boot ! processor, which is in slot 1. 2188000C A0xxxxxx ! Disregard bit <31> (which indicates a ! DWMBB test failure); the failing test ! number is 20. When a failure occurs in power-up test, you can examine the XGPR register to determine the failing test number. The XGPR register of the (XRP) processor that failed self-test or CPU/memory interaction test, or of the boot processor if DWMBB test failed, contains the failing test number. If all power-up tests pass, the XGPR register contains other data and should be ignored. To examine the XGPR register, first see Table 4-3 to determine the base address (BB) of the (XRP) processor 's node. Then calculate the address of the XGPR register by adding 0C (hex) to the base address. 4-24 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual The failing test number is derived from the upper byte (bits <31:24>) of the longword returned. For self-test, the upper byte contains the failing test number. If CPU/memory interaction test fails, this byte contains the failing test number plus 49. If DWMBB test fails, bit <31> is set (making the first digit 8 through A), and bits <30:24> contain the failing test number. All numbers are expressed in binary-coded decimal (BCD). See Table 4-4. Table 4-3: XMI Base Addresses ------------------------------------------------------------ Slot Node Base Address (BB) ------------------------------------------------------------ 1 1 2188 0000 2 2 2190 0000 3 3 2198 0000 4 4 21A0 0000 5 5 21A8 0000 6 6 21B0 0000 7 7 21B8 0000 8 8 21C0 0000 9 9 21C8 0000 10 A 21D0 0000 11 B 21D8 0000 12 C 21E0 0000 13 D 21E8 0000 14 E 21F0 0000 ------------------------------------------------------------ (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-25 Table 4-4: Interpreting XGPR Failing Test Numbers ------------------------------------------------------------ Failing Diagnostic XGPR <31> XGPR <30:24> (BCD) Test Numbers ------------------------------------------------------------ Self-test 1 Clear 1-49 1-49 CPU/memory interaction test 2 Clear 50-66 1-17 Additional memory 3 Clear 67-73 3 DWMBB test 4 Set 1-26 1-26 ------------------------------------------------------------ 1 See Table 4-6, KA64A Self-Test -- RBD 0. 2 See Table 4-7, CPU/Memory Interaction Tests -- RBD 1. 3 See Table 4-2, (XRP) Error LEDs. 4 See Table 7-5, (xbi_plus_title) RBD Tests. ------------------------------------------------------------ 4-26 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual 4.9 ROM-Based Diagnostics The (XRP) ROMs contain diagnostics, which you run using the boot processor 's RBD monitor program described in Chapter 2. RBD 0 and RBD 1 test the CPU, memory, and their interaction. RBD 2 tests the DWMBB/A and DWMBB/B adapters, and RBD 3 tests XMI memories. Table 4-5: ROM-Based Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ Diagnostic Test ------------------------------------------------------------ 0 (XRP) self-test 1 (XRP) CPU/memory interaction tests 2 (XBI_plus) tests 3 XMI memory tests ------------------------------------------------------------ 4-28 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual RBD 0 is the same as the (XRP) self-test. It is useful for running several passes when a processor fails self-test intermittently. Section 4.10.1 shows examples of running RBD 0 on both the boot processor and a secondary processor, and lists the tests in RBD 0. RBD 1 is the same as the CPU/memory interaction tests. It is useful for running several passes when a processor fails CPU/memory interaction tests intermittently. Section 4.10.2 shows an example and lists the tests. RBD 2 is the set of tests that the boot processor runs for each DWMBB VAXBI-to-XMI adapter when the system is powered on. (The DWMBB has no on-board self-test of its own.) Section 7.4 shows an example and lists the tests. RBD 3 is a set of XMI memory tests that sizes and runs extended tests on all of memory. Sections 6.11 and 6.12 list the tests and show examples. For a detailed explanation of the diagnostic printout, see Chapter 2. (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-29 4.10 (XRP) ROM-Based Diagnostics 4.10.1 Self-Test -- RBD 0 RBD 0 is equivalent to the (XRP) self-tests. The first 37 tests test scalar CPU modules; tests 38-49 test vector modules. Example 4-4: Self-Test -- RBD 0 >>> T/R ! Command to enter RBD monitor program. Short ! for TEST/RBD. RBD1> ! RBD monitor prompt, where 1 is the hexa- ! decimal node number of the boot processor. RBD1> ST0/TR/HE ! Runs the (XRP) self-test on boot processor ! Trace prints each test number; halt on error ! Test results written to the console terminal: ;XRP/V_ST 3.00 ; T0001 T0002 T0003 T0004 T0005 T0006 T0007 T0008 T0009 T0010 ; T0011 T0012 T0013 T0014 T0015 T0016 T0017 T0018! ; F" 1 8082 1# ; HE REX520 XX T0018! ; 10 AAAAAAAA A8AAAAAA 00000000 000004AC 2006451F 01 ; F 1 8082 1 ;00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 RBD1> In Example 4-4: ! Test 18 failed. The /HE switch causes execution to stop when the error is encountered. " F indicates failure. # The diagnostic ran for one pass. 4-30 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Example 4-5: Running (XRP) Self-Test (RBD 0) on a Secondary Processor >>> SET CPU 2! >>> T/R RBD2> ST0/TR" ! Note that only 37 tests ran. If a vector ! processor was present 49 tests would run ;XRP/V_ST 1.00 ; T0001 T0002 T0003 T0004 T0005 T0006 T0007 T0008 T0009 T0010 ; T0011 T0012 T0013 T0014 T0015 T0016 T0017 T0018 T0019 T0020 ; T0021 T0022 T0023 T0024 T0025 T0026 T0027 T0028 T0029 T0030 ; T0031 T0032 T0033 T0034 T0035 T0036 T0037 ; P 2 8082 1 ;00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 000000000 00000000 00000000 In Example 4-5: ! This command causes the (XRP) module at node 2 to become the primary processor. " The prompt indicates that the CPU at node 2 is the primary processor. RBD 0 is run on this processor. (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-31 Table 4-6: (XRP) Self-Test -- RBD 0 ------------------------------------------------------------ Test Function ------------------------------------------------------------ KA64A Tests ------------------------------------------------------------ T0001 (XRP) ROM Checksum Test T0002 IPL Step-Down Test T0003 RSSC Configuration Register Test T0004 RSSC RAM Test T0005 RSSC Output Port Test T0006 RSSC Address Decode Register Access Test T0007 RSSC Console UART External Loopback and Baud Rate Test T0008 RSSC Console UART Internal Loopback and Interrupt Test T0009 (XRP) EEPROM Test T0010 RSSC Input Port Test T0011 RSSC Bus Timeout Test T0012 RSSC Programmable Timers Test T0013 RCSR Register Test T0014 RSSC TOY Clock Test T0015 RSSC Interval Timer Test T0016 Interrupts at IPL 14 to 17 Test T0017 Primary Cache Tag Store Test T0018 Primary Cache Data RAM March Test T0019 Backup Tag Store Test T0020 Flush Cache Test T0021 Backup Tag Store Parity Error Test T0022 C-Chip Primary Tag Store Test T0023 C-Chip Refresh Register Test T0024 Backup Cache Data Line Test T0025 Backup Cache Data RAM March Test T0026 Backup Cache Data Parity RAM March Test 4-32 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 4-6 (Cont.): (XRP) Self-Test -- RBD 0 ------------------------------------------------------------ Test Function ------------------------------------------------------------ KA64A Tests ------------------------------------------------------------ T0027 Cache Mask Write Test T0028 Data Parity Logic Test T0029 Cache Disable Test T0030 XGPR Register Test T0031 CNAK Test T0032 IVINTR Test T0033 Multiple Interrupt Test T0034 DC520 Critical Path Test T0035 F-Chip Test T0036 Disable F-Chip Test T0037 F-Chip Critical Path Test ------------------------------------------------------------ FV64A Tests ------------------------------------------------------------ T0038 VECTL Registers Test T0039 Verse Registers Test T0040 Load/Store Registers Test T0041 VIB Error Logic Test T0042 Other VECTL Chip Logic Test T0043 Verse and Favor Test T0044 Load/Store Translation Buffer and CAM Test T0045 Load/Store Cache Test T0046 Load/Store Instruction Test T0047 Load/Store Tag and Duplicate Tag Test T0048 Load/Store Error Cases Test T0049 Module Critical Path Test ------------------------------------------------------------ (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-33 4.10.2 CPU/Memory Interaction Tests -- RBD 1 RBD 1 is equivalent to the CPU/memory interaction tests. The first 13 tests test scalar CPU modules; tests 14-17 test vector modules. Example 4-6: CPU/Memory Interaction Tests -- RBD 1 >>> T/R ! Command to enter RBD monitor program RBD3> ! RBD monitor prompt, where 3 is the hexa- ! decimal node number of the processor ! that is currently receiving your input. RBD3> ST1/TR/HE ! Runs the CPU/memory interaction RBD with ! trace; halt on error. Test results ! written to the console terminal: ;CPUMEM 3.00 ; T0001 T0002 T0003 T0004 T0005 T0006 T0007 T0008 T0009 T0010 ; T0011 T0012 T0013 ; P! 3 8082 1" ;000000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 RBD3> In the example above: ! P means that the diagnostic ran successfully. " One pass was completed. 4-34 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 4-7: CPU/Memory Interaction Tests -- RBD 1 ------------------------------------------------------------ Test Function ------------------------------------------------------------ KA64A/Memory Interaction Tests ------------------------------------------------------------ T0001 Parity Error CNAK Read/Write Test T0002 Miss When Invalid Test T0003 Cache Read Fill Test T0004 Interlock Instruction Cache Test T0005 Octaword Write Buffer Test T0006 Quadword-Boundary Byte Write Buffer Test T0007 Two-Byte Write in Different Quadword Write Buffer Test T0008 Write Buffer Switch and Purge Test T0009 Statistical Write Buffer Test T0010 Hit Write Buffer Test T0011 Write Buffer Address Test T0012 Invalidate Test T0013 Hit on Disabled Tag Store Test ------------------------------------------------------------ FV64A/Memory Interaction ------------------------------------------------------------ T0014 Cache Test T0015 Write Buffer Test T0016 Duplicate Tag Test T0017 Miscellaneous Error Test ------------------------------------------------------------ (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-35 4.11 VAX/DS Diagnostics The (XRP) software diagnostics that run under the VAX Diagnostic Supervisor (VAX/DS) are listed in Table 4-8. An example follows. See Section 2.4 for instructions on running the supervisor. See Section 5.8 for vector-specific tests. Table 4-8: (XRP) VAX/DS Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ Program Description ------------------------------------------------------------ EVSBA VAX Standalone Autosizer EVSBB VAX Diagnostic Online Autosizer EVKAQ VAX Basic Instructions Exerciser, Part 1 EVKAR VAX Basic Instructions Exerciser, Part 2 EVKAS VAX Floating Point Instruction Exerciser, Part 1 EVKAT VAX Floating Point Instruction Exerciser, Part 2 EVKAU VAX Privileged Architecture Instruction Test, Part 1 EVKAV VAX Privileged Architecture Instruction Test, Part 2 ERKAX Manual Tests ERKMP Multiprocessor Exerciser EVUCA VAX 6000 EEPROM Update Utility ------------------------------------------------------------ Example 4-7: VAX/DS Commands for Running Standalone Processor Diagnostics DS> RUN EVSBA! DS> SEL KA0" DS> RUN ERKAX# DS> EXIT$ 4-36 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual The callouts in Example 4-7 are explained below: ! Run the standalone autosizer; then you do not need to attach devices to the supervisor explicitly. However, if you want to know how to use the Attach command for a specific diagnostic, enter: DS> HELP diagnostic_name ATTACH " The instruction and manual tests run on the boot processor. If the boot processor is the CPU with the lowest (XMI) node number (which is usually the case), issue the command to select KA0. The Diagnostic Supervisor numbers the processors consecutively. For example, if the (XRP) module with the second-lowest (XMI) node number were boot processor, you would select KA1. # This example runs the manual tests (ERKAX), which include powerfail, machine check, restart, and EEPROM functions. The diagnostic prints messages, and you must manually intervene using console switches. $ Exit from VAX/DS. (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-37 4.12 Machine Checks Figure 4-8 and Table 4-9 show parameters for machine checks. The machine check frame is pushed onto the interrupt stack. Figure 4-8: The Stack in Response to a Machine Check Table 4-9: Machine Check Parameters ------------------------------------------------------------ Parameter Value (hex) or Bit Description ------------------------------------------------------------ Byte Count (SP) 18 Size of stack frame in bytes, not including PSL, PC, or byte count longword Machine check code (SP+4) 01 Floating-point operand or result transfer error 02 Floating-point reserved instruction 03 Floating-point operand parity error 04 Floating-point unknown status error 05 Floating-point returned result parity error 4-38 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 4-9 (Cont.): Machine Check Parameters ------------------------------------------------------------ Parameter Value (hex) or Bit Description ------------------------------------------------------------ 08 Translation buffer miss in ACV/TNV microflow 09 Translation buffer hit in ACV/TNV microflow 0A Undefined INT.ID value 0B Undefined MOVCx state 0C Undefined instruction trap code 0D Undefined control store address 10 Cache read tag/data parity error 11 DAL bus or data parity read error 12 DAL bus error on write or clear write buffer 13 Undefined bus error microtrap 14 Vector module error Virtual address (SP+8) <31:0> Current contents of VAP register Virtual instruction buffer address (SP+C) <31:0> Current virtual instruction buffer address Interrupt state (SP+10) <22> ICCS bit <6> <15:1> SISR bits <15:1> Internal state (SP+14) <31:24> Difference between current PC and opcode PC <20:18> Address of last memory reference <17:16> Data length of last memory reference <15:8> Opcode <3:0> Last GPR referenced by E-box Internal register (SP+18) <31:0> Program counter (SP+1C) <31:0> PC at the start of the current instruction Processor status longword (SP+20) <31:0> Current contents of PSL ------------------------------------------------------------ (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-39 4.13 Console Commands Table 4-10 summarizes the console commands. The VAX 6000 Series Owner 's Manual gives a full description of each command, its qualifiers, and examples. Table 4-10: Console Commands ------------------------------------------------------------ Command Function ------------------------------------------------------------ BOOT Initializes the system, causing a self-test, and begins the boot program. CLEAR EXCEPTION Cleans up error state in XBER and RCSR registers. CONTINUE Begins processing at the address where processing was inter- rupted by a CTRL/P console command. DEPOSIT Stores data in a specified address. EXAMINE Displays the contents of a specified address. FIND Searches main memory for a page-aligned 256-Kbyte block of good memory or for a restart parameter block. HALT Null command; no action is taken since the processor has al- ready halted in order to enter console mode. HELP Prints explanation of console commands. INITIALIZE Performs a system reset, including self-test. PATCH EEPROM Patches console, diagnostic, and boot primitive code from a TK70 REPEAT Executes the command passed as its argument. RESTORE EEPROM Copies the TK tape's EEPROM contents to the EEP- ROM of the processor executing the command. SAVE EEPROM Copies to the TK tape the contents of the EEPROM of the pro- cessor executing the command. SET BOOT Stores a boot command by a nickname. SET CPU Specifies eligibility of processors to become the boot proces- sor or whether the vector processor is to be included in the sys- tem configuration. 4-40 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 4-10 (Cont.): Console Commands ------------------------------------------------------------ Command Function ------------------------------------------------------------ SET LANGUAGE Changes the output of the console error messages between nu- meric code only (international mode) and code plus explana- tion (English mode). SET MEMORY Designates the method of interleaving the memory mod- ules; supersedes the console program's default interleav- ing. SET TERMINAL Sets console terminal characteristics. SHOW ALL Displays the current value of parameters set. SHOW BOOT Displays all boot commands and nicknames that have been saved using SET BOOT. SHOW CONFIGURATION Displays the hardware device type and revision level for each XMI and VAXBI node and indicates self-test sta- tus. SHOW CPU Identifies the primary processor and the status of other proces- sors. SHOW ETHERNET Locates all Ethernet adapters on the system and dis- plays their addresses. SHOW LANGUAGE Displays the mode currently set for console error messages, in- ternational or English. SHOW MEMORY Displays the memory lines from the system self-test, show- ing interleave and memory size. SHOW TERMINAL Displays the baud rate and terminal characteristics function- ing on the console terminal. START Begins execution of an instruction at the address speci- fied in the command string. STOP Halts the specified node. TEST Passes control to the self-test diagnostics; /RBD qualifier in- vokes ROM-based diagnostics. UPDATE Copies contents of the EEPROM on the processor exe- cuting the command to the EEPROM of another proces- sor. Z Logically connects the console terminal to another proces- sor on the (XMI) bus or to a VAXBI node. ! Introduces a comment. ------------------------------------------------------------ (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-41 4.14 (XRP) Handling Procedures The (XRP) module is static sensitive and fragile. The CMOS2 technology used on this module is more vulnerable to static than past technology. The 25 mil leads used to attach chips to the module are very small, close together, and easily bent. Be careful with the module. Figure 4-9: Holding the (XRP) Module 4-42 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual The (XRP) module must be handled carefully. Figure 4-9 shows the proper way to hold the module. Be sure your hands do not touch any components, leads, or XMI fingers. When inserting it in or removing it from the XMI card cage, grasp the module only at the spot shown in Figure 4-10, avoiding any contact with the 25 mil leads. Do not use any component as a handle. To avoid damaging the (XRP) module, follow these handling procedures: 1. Always wear an antistatic wrist strap. 2. Before removing the module from its ESD box, place the box on a clean, stable surface. Be sure the box will not slide or fall. Never place the box on the floor. And be sure no tools, papers, manuals, or anything else that might damage the module are near it. Some components on this module can be damaged by a 600-volt static charge; paper, for example, can carry a charge of 1000 volts. 3. Hold the module only by the edges, as shown in Figure 4-9. Do not hold the module so that your fingers touch any components or leads. Be sure you do not bend the module as you are holding it. 4. Be sure nothing touches the module surface or any of its components. If anything touches the module, components or leads can be damaged. This includes the antistatic wrist strap, clothing, jewelry, cables, components on other modules, and anything in the work area (such as tools, manuals, or loose papers). Remove your jacket and roll up your sleeves before handling the module. Also remove any jewelry. (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-43 Figure 4-10: Inserting the (XRP) Module in an XMI Card Cage 4-44 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual You must take special precautions when inserting the (XRP) module in or removing it from the XMI card cage. 1. Be sure, when inserting the module in or removing it from the XMI card cage, that no part of the module comes in contact with another module or a cable. 2. When swapping out a module, place it in an unused XMI slot, if one is available, or set the module on an ESD mat while you install the new module. An unused XMI slot is the best place to leave a module that is being swapped out until it can be placed in the ESD box. If there are no extra slots, place the module you removed on an ESD mat on a stable, uncluttered surface, with side 1 (the side with the heat sinks) up. Do not put it on the top of the system cabinet. And never slide the module across any surface. The leads on the components are fragile and can be damaged by contact with fingers or any surface. 3. Hold the XMI card cage handle while removing or inserting the module. If it is not held in place, the handle can spring down and damage the module. 4. When inserting the module in the card cage, grasp it as shown in Figure 4-10, and slide it slowly and gently into the slot. 5. Do not attach the repair tag to the module. Place the repair tag in the plastic bag attached to the bottom of the ESD box. Allowing the repair tag to come in contact with the module can cause damage to a component. (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-45 4.15 CPU Replacement in Single CPU Systems There are two methods available to customize a processor in a single-processor system. The first uses the RESTORE command; the second sets the EEPROM by console command. 4.15.1 Using the RESTORE Command Use the RESTORE command to customize a replaced CPU in a single-processor system. Use this method only if the ROM revision of the spare is the same as the ROM revision of the CPU being replaced. Before you begin set the terminal baud rate to 1200. Example 4-8: Replacing a Single Processor #123456789 0123456789 0123456789 01234567# F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NODE # A . A . M M . . . . . . . P TYP & o . + . + + . . . . . . . + STF ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . B BPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . + ETF ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . B BPD . . . . . . + + . + . + . + + . XBI E + . . . . A2 A1 . . . . . . . . ILV . . . . 64 64 . . . . . . . . 128Mb ROM0 = V3.00 ROM1 = V3.00 ( EEPROM = 2.03/3.00 SN = 0000000000 ) ?4F System serial number has not been initialized ) >>> RESTORE EEPROM +@ ?6E EEPROM Revision = 2.03/3.00 ?70 Tape image Revision = 2.03/3.01 Proceed with update of EEPROM? (Y or N) !optional - may need latest console/diag patches again +A >>> BOOT +C 4-46 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual 1. Turn the upper key switch straight up to the Off position (0). 2. Remove the defective CPU module. 3. Insert the new processor module. 4. Turn the lower key switch to Halt. 5. Turn the upper key switch to Enable. 6. Check the self-test display for the processor, indicated by a P on the TYP line (usually in slot 1). See &. 7. If the processor shows a plus sign (+) on both the STF and ETF lines, it passed self-test. See '. 8. Compare the ROM revision ( of the new processor with the ROM revision of the one you just replaced. If they are the same, continue with this procedure; otherwise use the second method described in Section 4.15.2. 9. You will see the following message: ) ?4F System serial number has not been initialized. 10. Turn the lower key switch to Update. 11. Mount the TK cartridge containing the most recent saved image of the old processor 's EEPROM. 1 12. Issue the console command RESTORE EEPROM +@ to copy all areas of the EEPROM except the module-specific area to the boot processor 's EEPROM. 13. If any patches have been issued since the last save, use EVUCA to patch the EEPROM. See Section 4.18 for details. 14. Turn the lower key switch to the Auto Start position. 15. Boot the operating system +C. Booting will initialize the system and the EEPROM will be read. If the system console baud rate was not normally set at 1200, you will have to change the terminal baud rate back to its original value. ------------------------------------------------------------ 1 When the system is installed or after maintenance, customer service engineers should save the EEPROM on a TK cartridge if available. The cartridge is left in the care of the customer. Subsequently, the EEPROM might have been changed and saved several times. This would normally happen following a PATCH operation. (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-47 4.15.2 Using SET Commands When replacing the only processor module in a system that does not have a TK, you must enter console commands that customize the EEPROM. The Site Management Guide should contain this information. Before you begin set the terminal baud rate to 1200. Example 4-9: Replacing a Single Processor #123456789 0123456789 0123456789 01234567# F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NODE # A A . . M M . . . . . . . P TYP ' + + . . + + . . . . . . . + STF ( . . . . . . . . . . . . . B BPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . + ETF ( . . . . . . . . . . . . . B BPD . . . . A2 A1 . . . . . . . . ILV . . . . 64 64 . . . . . . . . 128Mb ROM0 = V3.00 ROM1 = V3.00 EEPROM = 2.03/3.00 SN = 0000000000 ?4F System serial number has not been initialized >>> ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ ESC ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ (or ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ CTRL/3 ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ ) ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ DEL ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ SET SYSTEM SERIAL ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ RET ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ +> ! Follow the prompts to set the Serial Number. >>> SET BOOT DEFAULT /XMI:E DU0 +? >>> SET LANGUAGE INTERNATIONAL +@ OR >>> SET LANGUAGE ENGLISH >>> SET TERMINAL /[NO]SCOPE /SPEED:9600 /[NO]BREAK +A !optional - may need latest console/diag patches +B >>> BOOT +C 4-48 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual 1. Turn the upper key switch straight up to the Off position (0). 2. Remove the defective CPU module. 3. Insert the new processor module. 4. The EEPROM on the new module has a default baud rate of 1200. Make sure your terminal is set to 1200. 5. Turn the lower key switch to Halt. 6. Turn the upper key switch to Enable. 7. Check the self-test display for the processor, indicated by a P on the TYP line. See ' in Example 4-9. 8. If the processor shows a plus sign (+) on both the STF and ETF lines, it passed self-test (see (). 9. Turn the lower key switch to Update. 10. To correct the error message, enter the SET SYSTEM SERIAL command (see +>) and follow the prompts. The serial number should be in the Site Management Guide. If you do not find it there, look on an old self-test display or on the tape located near the bottom of the left rear cabinet upright. 11. To set up the boot alternatives, enter the SET BOOT command supplying the parameters recorded in the Site Management Guide. You might want to check these with the system manager. +? 12. Use the SET LANGUAGE command to set up the language desired.+@ 13. Use the SET TERMINAL command to set the EEPROM terminal characteristics.+A Results of the SET TERMINAL command will take effect when the system is reset. Make sure the terminal itself is set to the same characteristics. 14. Use whatever console commands are necessary to completely customize the EEPROM to the customer 's satisfaction. If any patches or boot primitives need to be selected, follow the procedure in Section 4.18. +B 15. Turn the lower key switch to the Auto Start position and Boot the operating system. +C (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-49 4.16 CPU Replacement in Multiple CPU Systems In a multiprocessing system replacing a processor requires customizing the new processor into the system. If the processor being replaced is the boot processor, then a few extra steps are required. Since different CPUs can have different ROM and EEPROM revisions in the same system, updating the EEPROM of any processor should be done using SET commands and EVUCA. Example 4-10: Retrieving EEPROM Information #123456789 0123456789 0123456789 01234567# F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NODE # A A A . M M M M . . P P P P TYP ' + + + . + + + + . . + + + + STF ( . . . . . . . . . . E E E B BPD . . . . . . . . . . + + + + ETF ( . . . . . . . . . . E E E B BPD . . . . A4 A3 A2 A1 . . . . . . ILV . . . . 128 128 128 128 . . . . . . 512Mb ROM0 = V3.00 ROM1 = V3.00 EEPROM = 2.03/3.00 SN = 0000000000 ?50 System serial number not initialized on primary processor. or +> ?2D For Secondary Processor 3 ?5A System serial number mismatch. Secondary processor has xxxxxxx >>> SET CPU 3 +? >>> ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ ESC ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ (or ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ CTRL/3 ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ ) ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ DEL ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ SHOW SYSTEM SERIAL +@ >>> SHOW ALL +A [System configuration and customization information prints] 4-50 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual 1. Turn the upper key switch straight up to the Off position (0). 2. Remove the defective CPU module. 3. Insert the new processor module. 4. If the processor you are replacing is the first processor on the right (usually in slot one), the console will make it the boot processor. If this is the case, make sure that the console terminal baud rate is 1200, the default baud rate of the spare. 5. Turn the lower key switch to Halt. 6. Turn the upper key switch to Enable. 7. Check the self-test display for the processor, indicated by a P on the TYP line. See ' in Example 4-10. 8. If the processor shows a plus sign (+) on both the STF and ETF lines, it passed self-test. ( 9. Turn the lower key switch to Update. 10. You will see either the ?50 message or the ?2D and ?5A messages.+> If you see mismatch messages, you may have to patch the EEPROM using EVUCA. See Section 4.18. If you see the ?50 message, the boot processor has been replaced and you must execute the next step; otherwise, go to Step 12. 11. Issue the SET CPU n command so that the console is connected to a processor that has been in the system for some time. +? 12. Get the system serial number by entering the SHOW SYSTEM SERIAL command. +@ 13. Issue the SHOW ALL command to get the customized boot parameters, interleave characteristics, terminal setup, and any other parameters. +A (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-51 If you collected the necessary information, you are now ready to customize the EEPROM. Example 4-11: Customizing an EEPROM >>> SET CPU 3 +B >>> ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ ESC ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ (or ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ CTRL/3 ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ ) ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ DEL ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ SET SYSTEM SERIAL +C ! Follow the prompts to set the serial number. >>> SET BOOT DEFAULT /XMI:E DU0 +D >>> SET LANGUAGE INTERNATIONAL or ENGLISH +E >>> SET TERMINAL /[NO]SCOPE /SPEED:9600 /[NO]BREAK +F >>> SET CPU/NOPRIMARY 3 +G !optional - may need latest console/diag patches again ,> >>> BOOT ,? 4-52 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual 14. Issue the SET CPU n command to connect the console to the primary or secondary processor you just replaced. +B 15. Issue the SET SYSTEM SERIAL command +C and follow the command prompts to correct the error message +>. 16. Use the SET BOOT command supplying the parameters displayed by the SHOW ALL command to set up the boot alternatives. +D 17. Use the SET LANGUAGE command to set the language desired. +E 18. Use the SET TERMINAL command to set the EEPROM terminal characteristics. These characteristics take effect when the system is initialized and the EEPROM is read again. Make sure the terminal is set to the same characteristics. +F 19. If the CPU you are working on has been designated as ineligible to be the boot processor, use the SET CPU/NOPRIMARY command to set its EEPROM correctly. +G 20. If any patches or boot primitives need to be selected, follow the procedure in Section 4.18. ,> 21. Turn the lower key switch to the Auto Start position and boot the operating system. ,? (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-53 4.17 How to Add a New Processor Add a new processor in a slot to the left of the boot processor so it will be a secondary processor at power-up. This procedure is similar to that described in Section 4.16. Example 4-12: Adding a Processor #123456789 0123456789 0123456789 01234567# F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NODE # A A A . M M M M . . P P P P TYP % + + + . + + + + . . + + + + STF & . . . . . . . . . . E E E B BPD . . . . . . . . . . + + + + ETF & . . . . . . . . . . E E E B BPD . . . . A4 A3 A2 A1 . . . . . . ILV . . . . 128 128 128 128 . . . . . . 512Mb ROM0 = V3.00 ROM1 = V3.00 EEPROM = 2.03/3.00 SN = SGO1234567 ?2D For Secondary Processor 3 ( ?5A System serial number mismatch. Secondary processor has xxxxxxx >>> SHOW ALL ) [System configuration and customization information prints] >>> SET CPU 3 +> ! the node number of the CPU you added >>> ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ ESC ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ (or ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ CTRL/3 ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ ) ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ DEL ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ SET SYSTEM SERIAL +? >>> SET BOOT DEFAULT /XMI:E/ DU0 +@ >>> SET LANGUAGE INTERNATIONAL or ENGLISH +A >>> SET TERMINAL /[NO]SCOPE /SPEED:9600 /[NO]BREAK +B >>> SET CPU/NOPRIMARY +C !optional - may need latest console/diag patches again +D >>> BOOT +E 4-54 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual 1. Turn the upper key switch straight up to the Off position (0). 2. Insert the new processor module to the left of the boot processor. 3. Turn the lower key switch to Halt. 4. Turn the upper key switch to Enable. 5. Check the self-test display for the processor, indicated by a P on the TYP line. See % in Example 4-12. 6. If the processor shows a plus sign (+) on both the STF and ETF lines, it passed self-test. & 7. Turn the lower key switch to Update. 8. You will see the ?2D and ?5A messages.( In addition, you may see messages indicating that you need to patch the EEPROM. Should you need to do so, see Section 4.18. 9. Type SHOW ALL to get the customized boot parameters, interleave characteristics, terminal setup, and any other parameters. ) 10. Connect the console to the CPU you just added with the SET CPU n command. +> 11. Issue the SET SYSTEM SERIAL command +? and follow the command prompts to correct the error message. 12. Issue the SET BOOT command supplying the parameters displayed by the SHOW ALL command to set up the boot alternatives. +@ 13. Issue the SET LANGUAGE command to set the language desired.+A 14. Issue the SET TERMINAL command to set the EEPROM terminal characteristics. +B 15. Issue the SET CPU/NOPRIMARY command if the customer does not want this particular CPU to become the primary for some reason. +C 16. If any patches or boot primitives need to be selected, follow the procedure in Section 4.18. +D 17. Turn the lower key switch to the Auto Start position and boot the operating system. +F (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-55 4.18 Patching the EEPROM with EVUCA To update the console and diagnostic ROMs on all VAX 6000 systems, use EVUCA under the Diagnostic Supervisor in standalone mode. Example 4-13: Patching the EEPROM with EVUCA -- Part 1 >>> BOOT /XMI:A /R5:110 EX0 # [Self-test display prints] Filename: ISL_LVAX Follow Prompts [Diagnostic Supervisor Banner] DS> LOAD EVUCA $ DS> ATTACH KA64A HUB KA0 1 % DS> ATTACH KA64A HUB KA1 2 DS> ATTACH KA64A HUB KA2 5 DS> ATTACH KA64A HUB KA3 6 DS> SELECT ALL & DS> SET TRACE DS> START .. Program: EVUCA - VAX 6000 EEPROM Update Utility, revision 0.5, 5 tests, Testing: _KA0 _KA1 _KA2 _KA3 Booting secondary CPU 02. Booting secondary CPU 05. Booting secondary CPU 06. Test 2: Load data from media Data file? ' Searching for data file... Data file loaded. Looking for patch for CPU 01 - ROM 03.00 EEPROM 03.00 No patch image was found for CPU 01 - ROM 03.00 EEPROM 03.00 ( Looking for patch for CPU 02 - ROM 03.00 EEPROM 03.00 No patch image was found for CPU 02 - ROM 03.00 EEPROM 03.00 Looking for patch for CPU 05 - ROM 02.00 EEPROM 02.00 Patch image is revision 02.02 Do you really want to apply this patch [(No), Yes] YES ) Looking for patch for CPU 06 - ROM 02.00 EEPROM 02.02 Patch image is revision 02.02 Do you really want to apply this patch [(No), Yes] Test 3: Determine Typecodes Updated +> 4-56 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual 1. Turn the lower key switch to Update. 2. Load the latest diagnostic CD in the CD drive. The CD is labeled 6000_ DIAG_x where x is a letter revision. 3. Boot the VAX Diagnostic Supervisor from a CD server using a command similar to that shown in Example 4-13 (see #). Alternatively, you could boot the supervisor from some other disk, perform the appropriate ATTACH commands, and then use the VAX/DS command SET LOAD to load EVUCA from the CD server. If you have already copied the latest diagnostics to a local disk, run EVUCA from there. 4. At the DS> prompt, type LOAD EVUCA (see $ in Example 4-13). 5. Issue the ATTACH command similar to that shown by % to enable the VAX/DS access to the CPUs on the system. 6. The CPUs are selected, TRACE is set, and EVUCA is started (see &). 7. Test 2 of EVUCA selects the correct patch file for the system being patched. '. A carriage return is the appropriate response. (Test 1 is for Manufacturing Automated Verification System use.) 8. After loading the file, EVUCA identifies the ROM and EEPROM revisions of each CPU in the system and reports whether that revision has a patch. CPUs at nodes 1 and 2 ( have no patches. 9. When a patch is found, EVUCA asks the operator whether the patch should be applied. For CPU 05 the patch image found is 2.02 and the EEPROM revision is 2.00. A "yes" response is given (see )). For CPU 06 the patch revision is 2.02 but the EEPROM revision is 2.02. Therefore, the choice is made not to patch this EEPROM. 10. Test 3 determines what sections of the EEPROM need updating. (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-57 Example 4-14: Patching the EEPROM with EVUCA -- Part 2 Test 4: Update EEPROM data +A Getting selectable boot primitives for CPU 05, ROM 02.00 [I/O device types in system identified] [Boot primitives available identified] Available boot primitive space is 27F4 Please enter what boot primitive to delete by number. [1-3(D)] 2 Boot primitives fit into allotted EEPROM area. Secondary cpus are being updated, please wait a maximum of 20 seconds. +B Updating CPU 05 Test 5: Show Boot primitives ROM boot primitives for CPU 01, revision 3.00 are: 1 This boot primitive supports the following: - boot primitive designation DI - boot primitive designation MI - boot primitive designation CI Device CIBCA, device type 0108 +C Device CIXCD, device type 0C05 . . . [Messages about retrieving secondary CPU boot primitives] CPU 02 has the same console revision as node 01. +D Boot primitives are the same for these cpus. ROM boot primitives for CPU 05, are: 1 This boot primitive supports the following: - boot primitive designation CI +E 2 This boot primitive supports the following: - boot primitive designation DU . . . EEPROM boot primitives for CPU 05 are: 1 This boot primitive supports the following: - boot primitive designation ET . . . CPU 06 has the same console revision as node 05. Boot primitives are the same for these cpus. The primary CPU was not updated. Secondary CPU 05, was successfully updated. Example 4-14 Cont'd on next page 4-58 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Example 4-14 (Cont.): Patching the EEPROM with EVUCA -- Part 2 Current ROM and EEPROM revisions for each CPU are: [ROM revisions and EEPROM revisions summarized for each CPU] +F .. End of run, 0 errors detected, pass count is 1, time is 24-SEP-1990 17:06:57.88 DS> 13. Test 4 creates a new updated EEPROM image in memory (see +A). Several boot primitives are available. Those that are permanent reside in ROM; those that are selectable or are patched reside in the EEPROM. If all boot primitives fit, EVUCA will not go through a selection process. However, if all primitives do not fit, the user is shown all the boot primitives available and prompted to choose which primitive is not wanted. If enough space is available, EVUCA continues. If enough space is not available, the user must choose another unwanted primitive. This process continues until space is available for the remaining primitives. 14. Once the primitives fit, the EEPROMs are updated and the message noted by +B is printed. 15. Later ROM revisions identify both what boot primitives are availiable and what devices they support (see +C). 16. CPU 2 and CPU 1 have same revision and have the same boot primitives +D. 17. CPU 5 has been patched, and test 5 shows the primitives in ROM followed by those in EEPROM +E. Since the ROM is an older revision, the devices the primitives support are not printed. 18. CPU 5 and 6 are now the same +F. (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-59 4.19 (XRP) Registers The (XRP) registers consist of the proces- sor status longword, internal processor registers, (XRP) registers in (XMI) private space, (XMI) required registers, and 16 general pur- pose registers. Table 4-11: (XRP) Internal Processor Registers ------------------------------------------------------------ Register Mnemonic Address Type Class ------------------------------------------------------------ Kernel Stack Pointer KSP IPR0 R/W 1 Executive Stack Pointer ESP IPR1 R/W 1 Supervisor Stack Pointer SSP IPR2 R/W 1 User Stack Pointer USP IPR3 R/W 1 Interrupt Stack Pointer ISP IPR4 R/W 1 Reserved IPR5-IPR7 3 P0 Base P0BR IPR8 R/W 1 P0 Length P0LR IPR9 R/W 1 P1 Base P1BR IPR10 R/W 1 P1 Length P1LR IPR11 R/W 1 ------------------------------------------------------------ Key to Types: R-Read W-Write R/W-Read/write Key to Classes: 1-Implemented by the (XRP) (as specified in the VAX Architecture Refer- ence Manual). 2-Implemented uniquely by the (XRP). 3-Not implemented. Read as zero; NOP on write. 4-Access not allowed; accesses result in a reserved operand fault. 5-Accessible, but not fully implemented; accesses yield UNPREDICTABLE results. 6-Implemented by the FV64A vector module. I-The register is initialized on (XRP) reset (power-up, system re- set, and node reset). 4-60 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 4-11 (Cont.): (XRP) Internal Processor Reg- isters ------------------------------------------------------------ Register Mnemonic Address Type Class ------------------------------------------------------------ System Base SBR IPR12 R/W 1 System Length SLR IPR13 R/W 1 Reserved IPR14-IPR15 3 Process Control Block Base PCBB IPR16 R/W 1 System Control Block Base SCBB IPR17 R/W 1 Interrupt Priority Level IPL IPR18 R/W 1 I AST Level ASTLVL IPR19 R/W 1 I Software Interrupt Request SIRR IPR20 W 1 Software Interrupt Summary SISR IPR21 R/W 1 I Reserved IPR22-IPR23 3 Interval Counter Control and Status ICCS IPR24 R/W 2 I Reserved IPR25-IPR26 3 Time-of-Year Clock TODR IPR27 R/W 1 Console Storage Receiver Status CSRS IPR28 R/W 5 I Console Storage Receiver Data CSRD IPR29 R 5 I Console Storage Transmitter Status CSTS IPR30 R/W 5 I Console Storage Transmitter Data CSTD IPR31 W 5 I Console Receiver Control/Status RXCS IPR32 R/W 2 I Console Receiver Data Buffer RXDB IPR33 R 2 I Console Transmitter Control/Status TXCS IPR34 R/W 2 I Console Transmitter Data Buffer TXDB IPR35 W 2 I Reserved IPR36-IPR37 3 Machine Check Error Summary MCESR IPR38 W 2 Reserved IPR39 3 Accelerator Control and Status ACCS IPR40 R/W 2 I Reserved IPR41 3 (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-61 Table 4-11 (Cont.): (XRP) Internal Processor Reg- isters ------------------------------------------------------------ Register Mnemonic Address Type Class ------------------------------------------------------------ Console Saved PC SAVPC IPR42 R 2 Console Saved PSL SAVPSL IPR43 R 2 Reserved IPR44-IPR46 3 Translation Buffer Tag TBTAG IPR47 W 2 Reserved IPR48-IPR54 3 I/O Reset IORESET IPR55 W 2 Memory Management Enable MAPEN IPR56 R/W 1 I Translation Buffer Invalidate All TBIA IPR57 W 1 Translation Buffer Invalidate Single TBIS IPR58 W 1 Translation Buffer Data TBDATA IPR59 W 2 Reserved IPR60-IPR61 3 System Identification SID IPR62 R 1 Translation Buffer Check TBCHK IPR63 W 1 Reserved IPR64-IPR111 3 Backup Cache Reserved BC112 IPR112 R/W 5 Backup Cache Tag Store BCBTS IPR113 R/W 2 Backup Cache P1 Tag Store BCP1TS IPR114 R/W 2 Backup Cache P2 Tag Store BCP2TS IPR115 R/W 2 Backup Cache Refresh BCRFR IPR116 R/W 2 Backup Cache Index BCIDX IPR117 R/W 2 Backup Cache Status BCSTS IPR118 R/W 2 I Backup Cache Control BCCTL IPR119 R/W 2 I Backup Cache Error BCERR IPR120 R 2 Backup Cache Flush Backup Tag Store BCFBTS IPR121 W 2 Backup Cache Flush Primary Tag Store BCFPTS IPR122 W 2 4-62 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 4-11 (Cont.): (XRP) Internal Processor Reg- isters ------------------------------------------------------------ Register Mnemonic Address Type Class ------------------------------------------------------------ Reserved IPR123 2 Vector Interface Error Status VINTSR IPR123 R/W 2 Primary Cache Tag Store PCTAG IPR124 R/W 2 Primary Cache Index PCIDX IPR125 R/W 2 Primary Cache Error Address PCERR IPR126 R/W 2 Primary Cache Status PCSTS IPR127 R/W 2 I Reserved IPR128-IPR143 3 Vector Processor Status VPSR IPR144 R/W 6 Vector Arithmetic Exception VAER IPR145 R 6 Vector Memory Activity Check VMAC IPR146 R 6 Vector Translation Buffer Invalidate All VTBIA IPR147 W 6 Reserved IPR148-IPR156 5 Vector Indirect Register Address VIADR IPR157 R/W 6 Vector Indirect Data Low VIDLO IPR158 R/W 6 Vector Indirect Data High VIDHI IPR159 R/W 6 ------------------------------------------------------------ The IPRs are explicitly accessible to software only by the Move To Processor Register (MTPR) and Move From Processor Register (MFPR) instructions, which require kernel mode privileges. From the console, EXAMINE/I and DEPOSIT/I commands read and write the IPRs. (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-63 Table 4-12: (XMI) Registers for the (XRP) ------------------------------------------------------------ Register Mnemonic Address ------------------------------------------------------------ XMI Device XDEV BB + 00 XMI Bus Error XBER BB + 04 XMI Failing Address XFADR BB + 08 XMI GPR XGPR BB + 0C (XRP) Control and Status RCSR BB + 10 ------------------------------------------------------------ Note: "BB" = base address of an XMI node, which is the address of the first location in nodespace. 4-64 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 4-13: (XRP) Registers in (XMI) Private Space ------------------------------------------------------------ Register Mnemonic Address ------------------------------------------------------------ Control Register Write Enable CREGWE 2000 0000 Console ROM (halt protected) 2004 0000 to 2007 FFFF Console EEPROM (halt protected) 2008 0000 to 2008 7FFF Console ROM (not halt protected) 200C 0000 to 200F FFFF Console EEPROM (not halt protected) 2010 0000 to 2010 7FFF RSSC Base Address SSCBAR 2014 0000 RSSC Configuration SSCCNR 2014 0010 RSSC Bus Timeout Control SSCBTR 2014 0020 RSSC Output Port OPORT 2014 0030 RSSC Input Port IPORT 2014 0040 Control Register Base Address CRBADR 2014 0130 Control Register Address Decode Mask CRADMR 2014 0134 EEPROM Base Address EEBADR 2014 0140 EEPROM Address Decode Mask EEADMR 2014 0144 Timer 0 Control TCR0 2014 0160 Timer 0 Interval TIR0 2014 0164 Timer 0 Next Interval TNIR0 2014 0168 Timer 0 Interrupt Vector TIVR0 2014 016C Timer 1 Control TCR1 2014 0170 Timer 1 Interval TIR1 2014 0174 Timer 1 Next Interval TNIR1 2014 0178 Timer 1 Interrupt Vector TIVR1 2014 017C RSSC Interval Counter SSCICR 2014 01F8 RSSC Internal RAM 2014 0400 to 2014 07FF IP IVINTR Generation IPINTR 2101 0000 to 2101 FFFF WE IVINTR Generation WEINTR 2102 0000 to 2102 FFFF ------------------------------------------------------------ (XRP) Scalar Processor 4-65 Chapter 5 (XRV) Vector Processor ------------------------------------------------------------ Of the two CPUs discussed in this book only the (rigel) system supports the vector processor. This chapter contains the following sections: · (xrv) Physical Description and Specifications · KA64A/FV64A Coprocessors · (xrv) Configuration Rules · Functional Description · Self-Test Results: Console Display and Self-Test LED · Self-Test Results: Scalar XGPR Register · Vector Processor Tests -- RBD 0 and RBD 1 · VAX/DS Diagnostics · Machine Checks · Vector Console Commands · FV64A Handling Procedures · How to Replace a Vector Module · Vector Processor Registers (XRV) Vector Processor 5-1 5.1 (xrv) Physical Description and Specifications The (XRV) is a vector processor used with the (XRP) scalar processor. The module designation is T2017. The two processor modules are connected with a VIB cable. Figure 5-1 shows side 1 of the module, and Figure 5-2 shows side 2. Figure 5-1: (XRV) Module (Side 1) 5-2 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Because the vector module has components on side 2, only memory modules can be installed next to side 2 (see Figure 5-2). Figure 5-2: (XRV) Module (Side 2) (XRV) Vector Processor 5-3 5.2 KA64A/FV64A Coprocessors The (rigel) uses a high-speed system bus, called the (XMI) bus, to interconnect its processors and its memory modules. In Figure 5-3 all I/O devices con- nect to the VAXBI bus. The (rigel) supports multiprocessing with up to six scalar processors or one or two scalar/vector pairs. Figure 5-3: VAX 6000 Model 400 Vector Processing System NOTE: Installation of an (xrv) vector processor requires that the attached (XRP) module (T2015) be at a minimum revision of K. In addition, the ROMs on any additional (XRP) modules must be at a minimum revision of V2.00 (ROM 0 and ROM 1). 5-4 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 5-1: (XRV) Specifications ------------------------------------------------------------ Parameter Description ------------------------------------------------------------ Module Number: T2017 Dimensions: 23.3 cm (9.2") H x 2.4 cm (0.94") W x 28.0 cm (11.0") D Temperature: Storage Range -40 o C to 66 o C (-40 o F to 151 o F) Operating Range 5 o C to 50 o C (41 o F to 122 o F) Relative Humidity: Storage 10% to 95% noncondensing Operating 10% to 95% noncondensing Altitude: Storage Up to 4.8 km (16,000 ft) Operating Up to 2.4 km (8000 ft) Current: 14.2A at +5V Power: 70W Cables: VIB cable, 17-02240-03 Diagnostics: ROM-based diagnostics 0 and 1. VAX/DS diagnostics, see Section 5.8. ------------------------------------------------------------ The FV64A vector processor is an integrated vector processor; that is, the vector processor module performs as a coprocessor that is tightly coupled with a host scalar processor. The two processors are physically connected by an intermodule cable, the VIB. The scalar processor is specifically designed to support its vector coprocessor, and the vector instruction set is implemented as part of the host native instruction set. Both the scalar and vector processors are on the XMI bus, and they share a common memory. A VAX 6000 Model 400 system can have one or two scalar/vector pairs. If the system has only one pair, it can also have additional scalar processors. See Table 6-2 for memory configuration rules related to vector processing. (XRV) Vector Processor 5-5 5.3 (xrv) Configuration Rules A vector processor must be installed to the left of its companion scalar processor. An intermodule cable connects the two modules. A memory module or an empty slot must be to the left of the vector processor. Any other configuration may damage the vector module. Figure 5-4: Scalar/Vector Configurations 5-6 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 5-2 shows the maximum number of scalar and vector processors supported in a VAX 6000 Model 400 system. Table 5-2: Processor Module Combinations ------------------------------------------------------------ Maximum CPUs Maximum Vectors Configuration (Slot 1 at Right) ------------------------------------------------------------ 6 0 P P P P P P 4 1 M V P P P P 2 2 M V P M V P ------------------------------------------------------------ Figure 5-4 shows system configurations for a VAX 6000 Model 400 system with one or two vector processors. The diagram on the left indicates the configuration for two scalar/vector pairs (V- -P) with a memory module in the slot to the left of the vector processor. The diagram on the right shows a single scalar/vector pair with additional scalar processors. Typically, processors are placed in the right (XMI) slots, beginning with slot 1 and extending to slot 6. Memories are placed in the middle slots, from slot A to slot 5 and then slots B and C, and VAXBI adapters are installed in the left side of the card cage, beginning with slot E. However, in a system with a vector processor, the modules should be installed as shown in Figure 5-4. These configurations must be followed to avoid damage to the modules and for performance reasons: · Because the (xrv) module has VLSI components with heat sinks protruding from both sides, only a memory module, with its low components, can be placed next to side 2 of the (xrv). · In a system with one scalar/vector pair and one or more additional scalar processors, the scalar processor of the pair should be prevented from being the boot processor for performance reasons. If the scalar/vector pair is to the left of other scalar processors, then the processor of the scalar/vector pair will not become the boot processor unless other processors fail self-test or have been disabled with the SET CPU console command. Alternatively, you can issue the SET CPU/NOPRIMARY command and give the node number of the attached scalar processor that you do not want to be the boot processor. (XRV) Vector Processor 5-7 5.4 Functional Description Figure 5-5 shows the three main functional units of the (XRV) processor: the vector control unit, the arithmetic unit, and the load/store unit, which includes the XMI interface and cache control. Figure 5-5: (XRV) Block Diagram 5-8 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual The (xrv) is an integrated vector processor, tightly coupled to the (XRP) scalar processor. The vector instructions are issued from the scalar processor, and the vector processor then dispatches them internally. All communication between the scalar and vector modules takes place across the intermodule VIB cable. All communication with memory is over the XMI bus. The vector processor has 16 vector data registers, each 64 quadwords long. There is a 1-megabyte direct-mapped cache and a 136-entry translation buffer. The (xrv) is an XMI module with the standard XMI Corner. The module has a cable connector at the rear edge of the module that connects to the rear edge of a (XRP) module. The instructions are issued over the VIB bus and pass to the VECTL chip, which then controls the operations on the module. It passes instructions to the load/store unit over the CD bus. The load/store unit then issues XMI memory transactions. The VECTL chip also issues instructions to the four pairs of Verse and Favor chips that make up the arithmetic unit. The vector data registers are in the Verse chips. The Favor chips perform the arithmetic operations on the data held in the Verse chips. The vector processor module uses the standard XMI Corner interface, but it functions only as an XMI commander. The vector processor does not issue transactions to I/O space, nor does it respond to XMI transactions directed to it. All error reporting is done by the scalar processor. (XRV) Vector Processor 5-9 5.5 Self-Test Results: Console Display and Self-Test LED You can check the vector processor self-test results in three ways: the self-test display if the vector is attached to the processor in node 1, the yellow self-test LED on the (xrv) module, and the contents of the XGPR register of the attached (XRP) module. If self-test passes, the large yellow LED on the vector module lights. If the vector module fails self-test, the light remains unlit. Example 5-1: Self-Test Results #123456789 0123456789 0123456789 0123456789 0123456789 # ! F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NODE # A A A . M M . . M V- -P M V- -P TYP" o + + . + + . . + + + + + + STF# . . . . . . . . . D E . E B BPD$ . . . . . . . . . + + + + + ETF% . . . . . . . . . D E . E B BPD& . . . . . . . . . + . + . + + . XBI E + . . . . A2 A1 . . B2 . . B1 . . ILV . . . . 64 64 . . 32 . . 32 . . 192Mb ROM0 = V3.00 ROM1 = V3.00 EEPROM = 2.03/3.00 SN = SG01234567' >>> Example 5-1 shows the self-test results for a system with two scalar/vector pairs. Each (XRP) runs its self-test and then tests any attached vector processor. ! The first line of the self-test printout is the progress trace. This line shows the self-test progress of the (XRP) in node 1. The numbers correspond to tests in the system self-test. If there is an attached vector processor module and self-test passes, the line prints as in Example 5-1 ending with #. If there is no attached vector processor, testing stops after the first 37 tests. If a test fails, the failing test number is the last one printed. For example, if test 14 fails, the line is printed as follows: #123456789 01234 5-10 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual " This line indicates the type (TYP) of module at each (XMI) node. Scalar processors are type P, and vector processors are type V. The dashes indicate that the scalar processors are attached to the adjacent vector processors. # This line shows self-test fail status (STF), which are the results of on- board self-test. Possible values for processors are: + (pass) - (fail) All processors passed self-test in this example. $ The BPD line indicates boot processor designation and whether vector processors are enabled or disabled. 1 When the system completes on- board self-test, the scalar processor with the lowest XMI ID number that passes self-test and is eligible is selected as boot processor -- in this example, the processor at node 1. The results on the BPD line indicate: · The boot processor (B) · Scalar processors eligible (E) or ineligible (D) to become the boot processor · Vector processors enabled (E) or disabled (D) In this example the vector processor attached to the scalar processor at node 4 has been disabled. A vector processor can be disabled by the SET CPU/NOVECTOR_ENABLED command. % During extended test (ETF) all processors run additional tests, which include reading and writing memory and using the cache. On line ETF, results are reported for each processor in the same way as on line STF-- a plus sign indicates that extended test passed and a minus sign that extended test failed. & Another BPD line is displayed, because it is possible for a different CPU to be designated boot processor if the processor first designated as the boot processor fails the extended testing. ' The last line of the self-test display shows the ROM and EEPROM version numbers and the system serial number. Version 2 or greater ROMs and EEPROMs are required to support vector processors. ------------------------------------------------------------ 1 If a revision J scalar processor has an attached vector module, the vector will be disabled, and this error message is displayed: ?7D Vector module is disabled-check (XRP) revision at node n. The attached scalar module (T2015) must be at a minimum revision of K. In addition, the ROMs on any other (XRP) modules must be at a minimum revision of V2.0. (XRV) Vector Processor 5-11 5.6 Self-Test Results: Scalar XGPR Register You can check self-test results in the self-test display or in the XGPR register. The failing test number is left in the upper byte of the XGPR register of the failing (XRP) processor. Figure 5-6: XGPR Register Example 5-2: XGPR Register After Power-Up Test Failure >>> E/P/L 2188000C ! Examine the longword at physical address ! 2188000C, the address of the XGPR 2188000C 45F0xxxx ! register of the processor in slot 1. ! The result indicates that test 45 of ! self-test failed (Load/Store Cache test). 5-12 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Figure 5-6 shows the XGPR register of the scalar processor. Bit <23>, when set, indicates that there is a vector processor attached to this processor. Bits <22:16> give status on an attached vector processor. The failing test number is derived from the upper byte (bits <31:24>) of the longword returned. For self-test, the upper byte contains the failing test number. If CPU/memory interaction test fails, this byte contains the failing test number plus 49. If DWMBB test fails, bit <31> is set (making the first digit 8 through A), and bits <30:24> contain the failing test number. All numbers are expressed in binary-coded decimal (BCD). See Table 5-3. As shown in Example 5-2, you can examine the XGPR register of the failing node to determine the failing test number. See Table 4-3 to determine the base address (BB) of the (XRP) processor 's node. Then calculate the address of the XGPR register by adding 0C (hex) to the base address. Table 5-3: Interpreting XGPR Failing Test Numbers ------------------------------------------------------------ Failing Diagnostic XGPR <31> XGPR <30:24> (BCD) Test Numbers ------------------------------------------------------------ Self-test Clear 1-49 1-49 CPU/memory interaction test Clear 50-66 1-17 Additional memory Clear 67-73 3 DWMBB test Set 1-26 1-26 ------------------------------------------------------------ (XRV) Vector Processor 5-13 5.7 Vector Processor Tests -- RBD 0 and RBD 1 T0038 through T0049 of RBD 0 test the vector processor during self-test. Tests 14-17 of RBD 1 test the vector processor during CPU/memory testing. Example 5-3: Running RBD 0 on a Secondary Processor with an Attached Vector Processor >>> SET CPU 4 ! >>> T/R RBD4> ST0/TR " ;XRP/V_ST 2.00 ; T0001 T0002 T0003 T0004 T0005 T0006 T0007 T0008 T0009 T0010 ; T0011 T0012 T0013 T0014 T0015 T0016 T0017 T0018 T0019 T0020 ; T0021 T0022 T0023 T0024 T0025 T0026 T0027 T0028 T0029 T0030 ; T0031 T0032 T0033 T0034 T0035 T0036 T0037 T0038 T0039 T0040 ; T0041 T0042 T0043 T0044 T0045 T0046 T0047 T0048 T0049 ; P 2 8082 1 ;00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 000000000 00000000 00000000 In Example 5-3: ! This command causes the (XRP) module at node 4 to become the primary processor. " The prompt indicates that the CPU at node 4 is the primary processor. RBD 0 is run on the scalar/vector processor pair at node 4. 5-14 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 5-4: Vector Processor Tests in Self-Test -- RBD 0 ------------------------------------------------------------ Test Function ------------------------------------------------------------ T0038 VECTL Registers Test T0039 Verse Registers Test T0040 Load/Store Registers Test T0041 VIB Error Logic Test T0042 Other VECTL Chip Logic Test T0043 Verse and Favor Test T0044 Load/Store Translation Buffer and CAM Test T0045 Load/Store Cache Test T0046 Load/Store Instruction Test T0047 Load/Store Tag and Duplicate Tag Test T0048 Load/Store Error Cases Test T0049 Module Critical Path Test ------------------------------------------------------------ Table 5-5: Vector Tests in CPU/Memory Interaction Tests -- RBD 1 ------------------------------------------------------------ Test Function ------------------------------------------------------------ T0014 Cache Test T0015 Write Buffer Test T0016 Duplicate Tag Test T0017 Miscellaneous Error Test ------------------------------------------------------------ (XRV) Vector Processor 5-15 5.8 VAX/DS Diagnostics The (xrv) software diagnostics that run under the VAX Diagnostic Supervisor (VAX/DS) are listed in Table 5-6. Example 5-4 lists VAX/DS commands used in testing vector processors. See Section 2.4 for instructions on running the supervisor. Table 5-6: (XRV) VAX/DS Diagnostics ------------------------------------------------------------ Program Description ------------------------------------------------------------ ERKMP Multiprocessor Exerciser (2 min--quick) (4 min--default) EVKAG VAX Vector Instruction Exerciser, Part 1 (1 1/2 min--quick) (16 min--default) EVKAH VAX Vector Instruction Exerciser, Part 2 (1 min--quick) (18 min--default) ------------------------------------------------------------ Example 5-4: VAX/DS Commands for Testing Vector Processors DS> RUN ERKMP ! Multiprocessor Exerciser also tests ! vector processors. DS> SET QUICK ! Abbreviated version of the VAX Vector ! Instruction Exerciser will be run. DS> DESELECT KA1 ! Removes the second scalar/vector pair ! from testing. DS> RUN EVKAG ! Part 1 of VAX Vector Instruction Exerciser. DS> RUN EVKAH ! Part 2. DS> BOOT n ! If more than one vector, make the other DS> DESELECT KA0 ! scalar of the second scalar/vector pair DS> SELECT KA1 ! the boot processor. Run EVKAG and EVKAH ! on the second vector. DS> BOOT n ! Restore original boot processor. DS> EXIT 5-16 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual 5.9 Machine Checks A machine check is an exception that indicates a processor- detected internal error. Figure 5-7 and Table 5-7 show these parameters. Figure 5-7: The Stack in Response to a Machine Check Table 5-7: (xrv) Machine Check Parameters ------------------------------------------------------------ Parameter Value (hex) Description ------------------------------------------------------------ Machine check code (SP+4) 14 Vector module error ------------------------------------------------------------ Machine checks are taken regardless of the current IPL. If the machine check exception vector bits (<1:0>) are not both one, the operation of the processor is undefined. The exception is taken on the interrupt stack and the IPL is raised to 1F (hex). See Table 4-9 for the complete list of machine check codes. (XRV) Vector Processor 5-17 5.10 Vector Console Commands Table 4-10 gives the console commands specific to the vector processor. Table 5-8: Vector Console Commands ------------------------------------------------------------ Command Function ------------------------------------------------------------ DEPOSIT Stores data in a specified address. Additional ad- dresses can be VMR, VCR, and VLR (for Vector Mask Reg- ister, Vector Count Register, and Vector Length Regis- ter). /M Defines the address space as a vector indirect register; ac- cesses addresses 400 and higher. /Q Quadword is the default data size for vector registers (ex- cept for VCR and VLR). /VE Defines the address space as the vector register set. EXAMINE Displays the contents of a specified address. Additional ad- dresses can be VMR, VCR, and VLR (for Vector Mask Reg- ister, Vector Count Register, and Vector Length Regis- ter). /M Defines the address space as a vector indirect register; ac- cesses addresses 400 and higher. /Q Quadword is the default data size for vector registers (ex- cept for VCR and VLR). /VE Defines the address space as the vector register set. SET CPU Specifies attributes of processors, such as eligibility to be- come the boot processor or whether a vector processor is en- abled. /NOVECTOR_ENABLED Prevents a vector module from being recognized in the sys- tem configuration. /VECTOR_ENABLED Specifies that a vector module will be recognized in the sys- tem configuration; the default. ------------------------------------------------------------ 5-18 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual DEPOSIT Examples 1. >>> DEPOSIT/VE V12 0 ! Deposits zero into all 64 elements ! of vector register V12. 2. >>> DEPOSIT V6:2C/n:2 0 ! Deposits zero into V6 beginning at ! element 2C (hex) and also in the next ! two elements. 3. >>> DEPOSIT VLR 1 ! Deposits one in the Vector Length ! Register. 4. >>> DEPOSIT/Q/P 200 FFFFFFFF45370201 ! Deposits FFFFFFFF45370201, a quadword ! of data into physical memory at address ! 200. 5. >>> DEPOSIT/M 440 0 ! Deposits zeros to vector indirect ! register with address 440 (hex). (XRV) Vector Processor 5-19 EXAMINE Examples 1. >>> EXAMINE VLR ! Examines the Vector Length ! Register. M 00000001 0E 2. >>> EXAMINE/Q/P 200 ! Examines the quadword in ! physical memory at address 200. 3. >>> EXAMINE/VE V12:2E ! Examines element 2E (hex) ! (which is 41 decimal) of vector ! data register V12. 4. >>> EXAMINE/M 440 ! Examines the vector indirect ! register at hex address 440. M 440 FFFFFFFF 00000000 ! /M is used to access vector ! indirect registers. 5-20 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual 5. >>> EXAMINE/VE V0 ! Examines vector register V0; system ! displays all 64 elements of register V0. VE V00:00 00000000 00000002 VE V00:01 00000000 00000002 VE V00:02 00000000 00000002 VE V00:03 00000000 00000002 VE V00:04 00000000 00000002 VE V00:05 00000000 00000002 VE V00:06 00000000 00000002 VE V00:07 00000000 00000002 VE V00:08 00000000 00000002 VE V00:09 00000000 00000002 VE V00:0A 00000000 00000002 VE V00:0B 00000000 00000002 VE V00:0C 00000000 00000002 VE V00:0D 00000000 00000002 VE V00:0E 00000000 00000002 VE V00:0F 00000000 00000002 VE V00:10 00000000 00000002 VE V00:11 00000000 00000002 VE V00:12 00000000 00000002 VE V00:13 00000000 00000002 VE V00:14 00000000 00000002 VE V00:15 00000000 00000002 VE V00:16 00000000 00000002 VE V00:17 00000000 00000002 VE V00:18 00000000 00000002 VE V00:19 00000000 00000002 VE V00:1A 00000000 00000002 VE V00:1B 00000000 00000002 VE V00:1C 00000000 00000002 VE V00:1D 00000000 00000002 VE V00:1E 00000000 00000002 VE V00:1F 00000000 00000002 VE V00:20 00000000 00000002 VE V00:21 00000000 00000002 VE V00:22 00000000 00000002 VE V00:23 00000000 00000002 VE V00:24 00000000 00000002 VE V00:25 00000000 00000002 VE V00:26 00000000 00000002 VE V00:27 00000000 00000002 VE V00:28 00000000 00000002 VE V00:29 00000000 00000002 VE V00:2A 00000000 00000002 VE V00:2B 00000000 00000002 VE V00:2C 00000000 00000002 VE V00:2D 00000000 00000002 VE V00:2E 00000000 00000002 VE V00:2F 00000000 00000002 VE V00:30 00000000 00000002 VE V00:31 00000000 00000002 VE V00:32 00000000 00000002 VE V00:33 00000000 00000002 VE V00:34 00000000 00000002 VE V00:35 00000000 00000002 VE V00:36 00000000 00000002 VE V00:37 00000000 00000002 VE V00:38 00000000 00000002 VE V00:39 00000000 00000002 VE V00:3A 00000000 00000002 VE V00:3B 00000000 00000002 VE V00:3C 00000000 00000002 VE V00:3D 00000000 00000002 VE V00:3E 00000000 00000002 VE V00:3F 00000000 00000002 (XRV) Vector Processor 5-21 5.11 (xrv) Handling Procedures Handle the processor modules with care. The technology used on the later 6000 series modules is more vulnerable to static than earlier technology. Also, these modules have 25 mil leads to the chips; these leads are small, close together, and easily bent. Figure 5-8: Holding the (xrv) Module 5-22 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual The later 6000 series modules require careful handling. Prepare yourself and the work area before handling these modules. Roll up your sleeves and remove any jewelry. Figure 5-8 shows the proper way to hold these modules. Follow these handling procedures to avoid damaging the processor modules: 1. Always wear an antistatic wrist strap. 2. Before removing the module from its ESD box, place the box on a clean, stable surface. Be sure the box will not slide or fall. Never place the box on the floor. And be sure no tools, papers, manuals, or anything else that might damage the module is near it. Some components on this module can be damaged by a 600-volt static charge; paper, for example, can carry a charge of 1000 volts. 3. Hold the module only by the edges, as shown in Figure 5-8. Do not hold the module so that your fingers touch any 25 mil devices, leads, or XMI fingers. Be sure you do not bend the module as you are holding it. 4. Be sure nothing touches the module surface or any of its components. If anything touches the module, components or leads can be damaged. This includes the antistatic wrist strap, clothing, jewelry, cables, components on other modules, and anything in the work area (such as tools, manuals, or loose papers). (XRV) Vector Processor 5-23 Figure 5-9: Inserting the (xrv) Module in an XMI Card Cage 5-24 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual You must take special precautions when moving the processor modules in or out of the XMI card cage. 1. Be sure, when inserting the module in or removing it from the XMI card cage, that no part of the module comes in contact with another module or a cable. The leads on the components are fragile and can be damaged by contact with fingers or any surface. 2. When you swap out a module, place it in the correct ESD box before you install the new module. 3. Hold the XMI card cage handle while removing or inserting the module. If it is not held in place, the handle can spring down and damage the module. 4. When inserting the module in the card cage, grasp it as shown in Figure 5-9, being careful not to touch any 25 mil devices, and slide it slowly and gently into the slot. 5. Do not attach the repair tag to the module. Place the repair tag in the plastic bag attached to the bottom of the ESD box. Allowing the repair tag to come in contact with the module can cause damage to a component. (XRV) Vector Processor 5-25 5.12 How to Replace a Vector Module If a vector module is defective, you can replace it with a new one. If you install an additional one, see the complete installation instructions in the VAX 6000 Series Upgrade Manual. Figure 5-10: Replacing a Vector Module in an XMI Card Cage 5-26 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual CAUTION: Special care must be taken when handling processor modules. See Section 5.11 before replacing this module. Also review the configuration rules in Section 5.3. While removing or inserting a module in the XMI card cage, you must hold the XMI card cage lever. Failure to do so may result in damage to the module. 1. Turn the upper key switch straight up to the Off position (0). 2. Open the cabinet door and remove the plastic door in front of the XMI card cage. CAUTION: You must wear an antistatic wrist strap attached to the cabinet when you handle any modules. 3. Disconnect the VIB cable (17-02240-03) from the vector module. 4. Remove the defective vector processor module. 5. Take the new vector processor module from the ESD box and insert it in the XMI card cage. Place the defective module in the ESD box. 6. Attach the connecting VIB (vector interface bus) cable. The keyed end of the cable attaches to the vector module. 7. Press the lever down to close the connector. 8. Replace the plastic door and shut the cabinet door. 9. Turn the lower key switch to Halt and the upper key switch to Enable. 10. Check the self-test display for the new vector processor, indicated by a V on the TYP line. 11. If the processor shows a plus sign (+) on both lines STF and ETF, it passed self-test. NOTE: Installation of an (xrv) vector processor requires that the attached (XRP) module (T2015) be at a minimum revision of K. In addition, the ROMs on any additional (XRP) modules must be at a minimum revision of V2.0 (ROM 0 and ROM 1). (XRV) Vector Processor 5-27 5.13 Vector Processor Registers The (XRV) internal processor registers are listed in Table 5-9. See Chapter 4 for the complete list of IPR registers. The console program allows you to access the vector registers. Software accesses the vector registers with MTPR/MFPR and MTVP/MFVP instructions. Table 5-9: (XRV) Internal Processor Registers ------------------------------------------------------------ Register Mnemonic Address Type Class ------------------------------------------------------------ Vector Interface Error Status VINTSR IPR123 R/W 1 Vector Processor Status VPSR IPR144 R/W 2 Vector Arithmetic Exception VAER IPR145 R 2 Vector Memory Activity Check VMAC IPR146 R 2 Vector Translation Buffer Invalidate All VTBIA IPR147 W 2 Vector Indirect Register Address VIADR IPR157 R/W 2 Vector Indirect Data Low VIDLO IPR158 R/W 2 Vector Indirect Data High VIDHI IPR159 R/W 2 ------------------------------------------------------------ Key to Types: R-Read W-Write R/W-Read/write Key to Classes: 1-Implemented by the (XRP) CPU module. 2-Implemented by the (XRV) vector module. ------------------------------------------------------------ 5-28 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual The IPRs listed in Table 5-9 are explicitly accessible to software only by the Move To Processor Register (MTPR) and Move From Processor Register (MFPR) instructions, which require kernel mode privileges. (The vector indirect registers are also accessed with MTPR and MFPR instructions. These registers are described in the System Technical User 's Guide.) From the console, EXAMINE/I and DEPOSIT/I commands read and write the IPRs. EXAMINE/M and DEPOSIT/M commands provide access to the vector indirect registers above hex address 400. EXAMINE/VE and DEPOSIT/VE provide access to the vector data registers. Other instructions, the Move To/From Vector Processor (MTVP/MFVP) instructions, are used by software to access the Vector Length, Vector Count, and Vector Mask control registers. From the console, these registers are specified as VLR, VCR, and VMR after DEPOSIT and EXAMINE commands, with no qualifiers. For more information on accessing the vector module registers, see the VAX 6000 Series Vector Processor Owner 's Manual. (XRV) Vector Processor 5-29 Chapter 6 MS65A Memory ------------------------------------------------------------ This chapter discusses the (xma2) memory module. Sections include: · Physical Description · Configuration Rules · Specifications · Functional Description · System Interleaving Requirements · MS65A Interleaving · Console Commands for Interleaving · Addressing · Memory Self-Test · Memory Self-Test Errors · Memory RBD · Memory RBD Test Examples · Control and Status Registers · Mixing MS65A and MS62A Memory Modules MS65A Memory 6-1 6.1 MS65A Physical Description The (xma2) memory module is a metal-oxide semiconductor (MOS), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), which provides up to 128 Mbytes of data storage. The memory module is designed for use with the (6000) system through the XMI bus. Figure 6-1: MS65A Module 6-2 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual The (xma2) memory module has the following features: · The memory module contains MOS dynamic RAM (DRAM) arrays; a CMOS memory control gate array that contains error correction code (ECC) logic and control logic; an EEPROM storage element and an XMI interface known as the XMI Corner. · Storage arrays are made up of two or four banks, either 155 or 299 DRAMs. · ECC logic detects single-bit and double-bit errors and corrects single-bit errors on 64-bit words. · Memory self-test checks all RAMs, the data path, and control logic on power-up. · Quadwords, octawords, and hexwords can be read from or written to memory. · Memory is configured by the console program for 2-, 4-, 8-way or no interleaving. MS65A Memory 6-3 6.2 MS65A Configuration Rules Figure 6-2 shows the order of placement of MS65A modules in the XMI backplane. Figure 6-2: MS65A Configuration Memory modules are configured after I/O adapter and processor modules. Install memory modules next to vector processors first, then install additional memories as follows: ! Install the first memory module in slot A. Fill all available slots left to right from slot A to slot 1. " Install any additional memory modules right to left in available slots from slot B to slot E. 6-4 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual 6.3 MS65A Specifications Table 6-1 gives the (xma2) module specifica- tions. Table 6-1: (xma2_title) Specifications ------------------------------------------------------------ Parameter Description ------------------------------------------------------------ Module Number: T2053 Dimensions: 23.3 cm (9.2") H and 28.0 cm (11.0") D Memory size: MS65A-BA 32 Mbytes MS65A-CA 64 Mbytes MS65A-DA 128 Mbytes Addresses: 16-Mbyte boundaries Starting Address 0 Mbytes to 512 Mbytes Ending Address 0 to 512 Mbytes Technology: DRAMS 1 or 4 Mbit dynamic RAMs Gate Arrays CMOS memory control gate array Interleave: 2-, 4-, 8-way or none Error Correction Code: Detects single- and double-bit errors and corrects single-bit er- rors Temperature: Storage Range -40 o C to 66 o C (-40 o F to 151 o F) Operating Range 5 o C to 50 o C (41 o F to 122 o F) Relative Humidity: Storage and Operating 10 to 95% noncondensing Altitude: Storage Up to 4.8 km (16,000 ft) Operating Up to 2.4 km (8000 ft) Current: 10A active, 3.8A standby, max. at +5V Power: 50W active, 19W standby, max. at +5V ------------------------------------------------------------ MS65A Memory 6-5 6.4 MS65A Functional Description The (xma2) consists of an XMI Corner, a memory control gate array, address and control drivers, block state DRAMs, DRAM arrays, and an EEPROM. Figure 6-3: MS65A Block Diagram 6-6 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual The XMI Corner is located on the (xma2) module and contains interface logic. The memory control gate array transfers data between the XMI Corner and the DRAMs. The memory control gate array also controls address multiplexing, command decoding, arbitration, and CSR logic functions. Address and control logic modifies address bits received from the XMI Corner. These modified address bits are used to control the selection of the DRAMs during reading and writing. Memory is arranged in two or four banks of DRAMs. Each bank contains either 155 or 299 DRAMs on each memory module. The data in the EEPROM is used to initialize the memory control gate array. After a power-up or system reset, the data in the EEPROM is loaded into the memory control gate array. MS65A Memory 6-7 6.5 System Interleaving Requirements System performance is affected by the speed with which memory responds to requests made of its resources. For this reason, (HYPERION) and (rigel) systems have memory interleaving requirements. Those re- quirements are given in Table 6-2. Table 6-2: VAX 6000 Interleaving Requirements ------------------------------------------------------------ Interleave Factor Model 300 Model 400 Model 400 with Vectors ------------------------------------------------------------ One way 310 320 330 410 420 Two way 340 350 360 430 440 410 or 420 with 1 vector Four way 450 460 420 with 2 vectors 430 or 440 with 1 vector ------------------------------------------------------------ 6-8 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual The interleave configuration requirements shown in Table 6-2 are necessary for system performance. Differences between the two systems are primarily due to cache differences on the two CPUs. Note that memory size is not the issue. However, to achieve 4-way interleaving the minimum memory capacity is 128 Mbytes (4 x 32-Mbyte arrays). MS65A Memory 6-9 6.6 MS65A Interleaving Interleaving optimizes memory access time and increases the effective memory transfer rate by operating memory modules in parallel. Figure 6-4: Examples of Interleaving 6-10 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Memory supports 2-, 4-, 8-way or no interleaving. Up to eight memory modules of the same size can be interleaved. Memory modules of different sizes can also be interleaved. Figure 6-4 shows three examples of interleaving. · A 2-way interleave set is made from two, same sized, arrays. · A 2-way interleave set is made from three memory arrays of different sizes. · The final example shows how the console builds a 4-way interleave set from several different array sizes. Interleaving is done on hexword boundaries. Interleaving addresses are set in the Starting and Ending Address Register by the console program (see Section 6.8). The (xma2) does not check for valid or invalid interleaving configurations. NOTE: Memory modules that fail self-test due to multiple-bit errors are not included in the interleave set. When different sizes of memory modules are installed in a (6000) system, the console interleaves the memory modules according to size and sets as follows: · Sorts memory modules into groups by size. · Interleaves the largest size memory modules first. · Stacks remaining sets of modules into sets that equal the largest size memory modules and interleaves them with the largest size memory modules. · Stacks remaining modules into sets of the next largest size memory modules and interleave them. · Continues stacking and interleaving memory modules until all memory modules have been interleaved (including noninterleaved modules). Unless the system requires a specific, dedicated memory use, let the console set the default interleave set rather than setting interleaving manually. In default, the console program chooses the optimal configuration for the system. MS65A Memory 6-11 6.7 Console Commands for Interleaving The SET MEMORY command is used to set memory inter- leaving in a configuration other than the default. This is not usually advisable, but occasional customer use will warrant overriding the original console setting of the interleave. The INITIALIZE command causes both (6000) sys- tems to execute (xma2) self-tests and the SET MEMORY commands to take effect. Example 6-1: SET MEMORY and INITIALIZE Commands >>> SET MEMORY /INTERLEAVE:DEFAULT ! ! For a system with one 64-Mbyte and two ! 32-Mbyte memory modules, it creates a 2-way ! interleave of 64-Mbyte memory modules ! (1x64-Mbyte and 2x32-Mbyte memory modules) ! located at XMI nodes A, 9, and 8. >>> SHOW MEMORY " ! Displays the memory lines from self-test. F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NODE # . . . . A2 A2 A1 . . . . . . . ILV . . . . 32 32 64 . . . . . . . 128Mb /INTERLEAVE:DEFAULT >>> SET MEMORY /INTERLEAVE:(8, 9+A) # ! Explicitly specifies what is created ! as requested by the user (two interleave ! sets with modules in nodes 8, 9, and A). >>> INITIALIZE $ ! Enables the SET MEMORY command to take effect [self-test display] >>> SHOW MEMORY % ! Displays the memory lines from self-test. F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NODE # . . . . B2 B1 A1 . . . . . . . ILV . . . . 32 32 64 . . . . . . . 128Mb /INTERLEAVE:(8, 9+A) >>> 6-12 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual The callouts in Example 6-1 are explained below. ! Shows the SET MEMORY command that configures interleaving with the console program. This command invokes the default interleaving configuration. It is recommended that this default be used, rather than trying to interleave memory manually. " The SHOW MEMORY command displays the node number (node #), interleave (ILV), and total usable memory (xxMb) lines from the self- test results. # Shows the SET MEMORY command that creates a 2-way interleave as requested by the user. In this example the user explicitly specified how to interleave the memory modules. Each interleaving set must contain the node number of the memory module. If there is more than one memory module in a set, they are joined by a + sign. Each set of interleaved memory modules must be separated by a comma. $ The system is initialized and the new memory interleave configuration takes effect. You cannot initialize a memory node by itself after a SET MEMORY command because memory addressing would be changed and data structures lost. % The SHOW MEMORY command displays the configuration set in #. NOTE: Refer to Chapter 5 of the VAX 6000 Series Owner 's Manual for detailed information on the SET MEMORY and SHOW MEMORY commands. The SET MEMORY command does not change memory interleaving immediately; it just modifies the memory configuration in the EEPROM. The memory configuration specified by the SET MEMORY command takes place when the system is initialized (by a power-up or INITIALIZE command). MS65A Memory 6-13 6.8 MS65A Addressing Memory addressing is set on hexword boundaries and depends on the interleaving sets organized by the console. Starting and ending addresses are determined by the console regardless of how interleaving is done (by the user or by the console). Figure 6-5: Memory Addressing 6-14 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Figure 6-5 shows the starting address (STADR), ending address (ENADR), and interleave (INTLV) registers of a sample interleave set. The contents of these registers are set by the console. The memory shown in Figure 6-5 is divided into two interleaving sets and totals 256 Mbytes. Set 0 consists of two 32-Mbyte arrays and one 64-Mbyte array. Set 1 consists of one 128-Mbyte array. The starting address of the first array is 0. The ending address is determined by multiplying the density of the array by the interleave factor (number of sets). For example, the starting address of the first array in set 0 is 0, and the ending address is 100 hex (64 decimal, which is equal to 32 multiplied by 2). The starting address of the second array is the same as the ending address of the first. Each array's interleave register indicates the set it belongs to (bits <7:5>) and the total number of interleave sets (bits <1:0>). The interleave register for the 128-Mbyte array indicates that the array is set 1 (bits <7:5>=001) of two interleave sets (bits <1:0>=01). MS65A Memory 6-15 6.9 Memory Self-Test The (xma2) performs an initialization and self-test sequence on power-up or when the sequence is requested by a console command. During self-test the array chip is initialized, all memory locations are tested, and the control and status registers are initialized. Example 6-2: MS65A Memory Module Results in Self-Test #123456789 0123456789 0123456789 01234567# F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NODE # A A . . M M M M . . . P P P TYP ! + + . . - + + + . . . + + + STF " . . . . . . . . . . . E E B BPD . . . . . . . . . . . + + + ETF . . . . . . . . . . . E E B BPD . . . . C1 B1 A2 A1 . . . . . . ILV # . . . . 64 64 64 64 . . . . . . 256Mb $ ROM0 = V3.00 ROM1 = V3.00 EEPROM = 2.03/3.00 SN = SGO1234567 >>> 6-16 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual The callouts in Example 6-2 are explained below. ! The TYP line shows that memory modules are installed in XMI slots 7 through A as indicated by the M in this row. " The STF line shows if memory modules pass self-test, as indicated by the + in this row. If a module fails self-test, a - is indicated, but the console still tests all pages within the module. The failing module is included in the configuration, and the addresses that fail self-test are not used by the system. # The ILV line indicates that two memory array modules are 2-way interleaved and the other two modules are interleaved by themselves. That is, memory modules in slots 7 and 8 are two-way interleaved into one interleave set (indicated by all modules beginning with the letter A). The module at node A failed its self-test and although used by the system it is not included in an interleave set. $ This system contains a total usable memory of 256 Mbytes (four 64- Mbyte memory modules). If all (xma2) nodes pass self-test, the CPU/memory test is performed on the (xma2) by the CPU. The console executes a simple read/write test to a small portion of memory. Since there are no errors from the self-test, the memory bitmap is set with all pages as good. MS65A Memory 6-17 6.10 Memory Self-Test Errors If an (xma2) node fails self-test, an explicit memory test is run on the failing module and console error messages are displayed. The failing module is still included in the memory configuration. Example 6-3: MS65A Memory Module Node Exclusion >>> SET MEMORY /INTERLEAVE:(8+9, A) >>> INITIALIZE >>> SHOW MEMORY F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NODE # . . . . B1 A2 A1 - . . . . . . ILV . . . . 64 64 64 . . . . . . . 192Mb /INTERLEAVE:(8+9, A) If an (xma2) node fails self-test, then the console executes an explicit memory test during the building of the bitmap. Failing memory modules are included in the configuration, although they are interleaved by themselves. The only way to exclude a memory module from interleaving is to use the SET MEMORY command without designating the node you want to exclude. Example 6-3 shows how to exclude the memory module at node 7. During the explicit memory test, any number of the following console messages might be displayed to aid the customer service engineer in diagnosing the problem. ?37 Explicit interleave list is bad. Configuring all arrays uninterleaved. This means that the explicit set of memory arrays for the explicit interleave includes no nodes that contain memory arrays. All memory arrays found in the system are unconfigured (the SET MEMORY command may have specified nodes that did not contain memory modules). ?45 Memory interleave set is inconsistent: n n ...((xyp) msg.) ?46 Memory interleave set is inconsistent: n n ...((XRP) msg.) This means that the listed nodes (n n) do not form a valid memory interleave set. One or more of the nodes might not be a memory array or the set contains an invalid number of memory arrays. Each listed memory array 6-18 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual that is valid will be configured uninterleaved; any memory array that is not included in the set will not be interleaved. ?46 Insufficient working memory for normal operation. ((xyp) msg.) ?47 Insufficient working memory for normal operation. ((XRP) msg.) This means that less than 256 Kbytes per processor of working memory were found. There may be insufficient memory for the console to function or for the operating system to boot. ?47 Uncorrectable memory errors -- long memory test must be performed. ((xyp) message) ?48 Uncorrectable memory errors -- long memory test must be performed. ((XRP) message) This means that a memory array contains an unrecoverable error. The console must perform a slow test to locate all the failing locations. (Slow = approximately 3 minutes per 32 Mbytes.) ?48 Memory not interleaved due to Uncorrectable errors. ((xyp)) ?4A Memory not interleaved due to Uncorrectable errors. ((XRP)) This means that the listed arrays would normally have been interleaved (by default or an explicit request). Because one or more arrays contained unrecoverable errors, this interleave set will not be constructed. NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for a list of (xyp) console error messages and Appendix B for a list of (XRP) console error messages. When self-test has finished running on the module, the yellow LED on the module lights, indicating that the module has completed self-test. After self-test, starting and ending addresses are set by the boot processor. Note that lighting the yellow LED does not mean that memory has passed self-test but only that self-test completed. MS65A Memory 6-19 6.11 Memory RBD RBD 3 of the ROM-based diagnostics sizes memory, runs extended memory tests, and indicates any failing tests. Table 6-3: Memory Tests -- RBD 3 ------------------------------------------------------------ Test Function ------------------------------------------------------------ T0001 1 Memory Self-Test (13 sec 2 ;3 ) T0002 4 CSR Addressability Test T0003 4 CSR Bit Toggling Test T0004 4 Parity Error Detection Test T0005 4 Error Detection and Correction Logic Test T0006 4 Data Path Test T0007 4 Quadword and Octaword Masked Write Logic Test T0008 4 Interlock Lock Logic Test T0009 1 Interleaving and Address Boundary Test (20 sec 2 ) T0010 1 ECC RAM March Test (20 min 2 ) T0011 1 RAM March Test (9 min-RAM; 17 min-ROM 2 ) T0012 1 RAM Moving Inversions Test (2.5 hrs-RAM; 4.5 hrs-ROM 2 ) ------------------------------------------------------------ 1 The /C qualifier is required for these tests. 2 Run times are approximate for one 32-Mbyte module. 3 If self-test fails, there is a 60 second timeout. 4 Tests T0002 through T0008 are run by default. ------------------------------------------------------------ 6-20 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Tests T0002 through T0008 are run by default. Tests T0001 and T0009 through T0012 must be selected by the user. Tests are performed on all (XMA2)s unless the user specifies a single (XMA2). Parameters specified in the command line (refer to Table 6-4) allow one or all memory modules to be tested. These parameters also allow RBD tests to be run from main memory or ROM for RBD tests T0011 and T0012. The /C (confirm destructive memory test) switch is required with RBD tests T0001, T0009, T0010, T0011, and T0012. Parameters are ignored by tests T0001 through T0010. Table 6-4: RBD 3 Parameters ------------------------------------------------------------ KA64A Parameter 1 KA62B Parameter Function ------------------------------------------------------------ 00 (or none) 1n Run tests T0011 and T0012 from main memory (RAM) and test all memory modules 0n 1n Run tests T0011 and T0012 from main memory (RAM) and test memory module n only 10 2n Run tests T0011 and T0012 from ROM and test all mem- ory modules 1n 3n Run tests T0011 and T0012 from ROM and test memory mod- ule n only ------------------------------------------------------------ 1 The first character indicates if the tests are run from RAM (0) or ROM (1). The second charac- ter indicates whether to test all modules (0) or a specific module (n), where n is the mem- ory module backplane slot (must be one of the following: A, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, B, or C). ------------------------------------------------------------ NOTE: If you suspect that all of memory is bad, run tests T0011 and T0012 from ROM. The CPU/memory interaction diagnostic also runs tests that exercise memory. See Chapter 3 for information on this CPU/memory interaction diagnostic. See Chapter 2 for more information on running the RBDs. MS65A Memory 6-21 6.12 Memory RBD Test Examples RBD 3 sizes memory, runs extended memory tests, and indicates any failing tests. Example 6-4 through Example 6-6 show the use of various qualifiers. Example 6-4: RBD 3 -- Test on All Modules with Halt on Error >>> T/R ! Command to enter RBD monitor program RBD3> ! RBD monitor prompt, where 3 is the hexa- ! decimal node number of the processor ! that is currently receiving your input RBD3> ST3/TR/HE ! Runs the default (XMA2) RBD ! test; test results written to the ! console terminal; tests will halt on ! any hard error found (/HE) ;XMA_RBD 3.00 ; T0002 T0003 T0004 T0005 T0006 T0007 T0008 ; S 3 8082 1 ! ; XX NO_XMA2 09 T0008 ; P 3 8082 1 ;00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 RBD3> Example 6-5: RBD 3 -- Test with Confirm Switch RBD3> ST3/TR/T=9:10/C ! Runs the (XMA2) RBD tests ! T0009 and T0010 only. These are ! destructive tests, so the confirm ! switch is needed. Confirm destructive ! memory test switch (/C) is required ! on tests T0001 and T0009 through T0012. ;XMA_RBD 3.00 ; T0009 T0010 ; P 3 8082 1 ;00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 RBD3> 6-22 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Example 6-6: RBD 3 -- Parameter RBD3> ST3/TR/T=11:12/C 0A ! Runs (XMA2) RBD tests ! T0011 and T0012 from RAM on the ! the memory module in slot A. Confirm ! destructive memory test switch (/C) ! is required on these tests. ;XMA_RBD 3.00 ; T0011 T0012 [RBD status messages are printed every two minutes; use the /DS qualifier in the command string to inhibit these messages.] ; P 3 8082 1 ;00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 RBD3> QUIT ! Exit from RBD monitor program ?06 Halt instruction executed in kernel mode. PC = 200601D8 PSL = 041F0604 ISP = 201405B4 >>> ! Console prompt returns In Example 6-4 note the status message in the display (!). The message fields are as follows: · S = Status message · 3 = Node from which the RBD is running · 8082 = Device type of node from which RBD is running · 1 = Pass 1 · XX = Undefined · NO_XMA2 = RBD does not perform parts of test 8 on MS65A memories · 09 = Node where MS65A resides · T0008 = Test 8 produced the status message The RBD completes with the normal pass/fail message. Only test 8, the Interlock Lock Logic Test, behaves this way; all other tests are run on both MS62As and MS65As. MS65A Memory 6-23 6.13 MS65A Control and Status Registers The memory contains 19 control and status registers (CSRs) to control the memory and log errors. All CSRs are 32 bits long and respond only to longword read and write transactions. Only full writes are performed to the CSRs. If a parity error occurs during a write operation, the operation is aborted and the contents of the CSRs are unchanged. The CSRs start at an address dependent upon the node ID. All CSR addresses are designated as BB + n, where n is the relative offset of the register. Table 6-5: (xma2) Control and Status Regis- ters . ------------------------------------------------------------ CSR Name Mnemonic Address ------------------------------------------------------------ Device Type Register XDEV BB 1 + 00 Bus Error Register XBER BB + 04 Starting and Ending Address Register SEADR BB + 10 Memory Control Register 1 MCTL1 BB + 14 Memory ECC Error Register MECER BB + 18 Memory ECC Address Register MECEA BB + 1C Memory Control Register 2 MCTL2 BB + 30 TCY Tester Register TCY BB + 34 Block State ECC Error Register BECER BB + 38 Block State ECC Address Register BECEA BB + 3C Starting Address Register STADR BB + 50 Ending Address Register ENADR BB + 54 Segment/Interleave Control Register INTLV BB + 58 Memory Control Register 3 MCTL3 BB + 5C Memory Control Register 4 MCTL4 BB + 60 ------------------------------------------------------------ 1 "BB" refers to the base address of an (XMI) node (2180 0000 + (node ID x 8000)) 6-24 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 6-5 (Cont.): (xma2) Control and Status Reg- isters ------------------------------------------------------------ CSR Name Mnemonic Address ------------------------------------------------------------ Block State Control Register BSCTL BB + 68 Block State Address Register BSADR BB + 6C EEPROM Control Register EECTL BB + 70 Timeout Control/Status Register TMOER BB + 74 ------------------------------------------------------------ < MS65A Memory 6-25 6.14 Mixing MS65A and MS62A Memory Modules This section discusses the interleaving of MS62A and (xma2) memory modules in Model 300 and Model 400 systems. For completeness the VAX 6000 Model 200 and the VAX 6000 Model 500 are included. Table 6-6: Memory Module Configurations ------------------------------------------------------------ System Type MS65A MS62A Mixed ------------------------------------------------------------ Model 200 1 Yes Yes Yes Model 300 2 Yes Yes Yes Model 400 3 Yes Yes Yes Model 500 Yes No No ------------------------------------------------------------ 1 The minimum CPU ROM revision required is 5.00. 2 The minimum CPU ROM revision required is 6.00. 3 The minimum CPU ROM revision required is 3.00. ------------------------------------------------------------ If (xma2)s or a mix of memory modules are used in a Model 200, 300, or 400 system, a ROM upgrade kit is required. The console and diagnostic ROMs are replaced, so that (xma2)s will be supported. See the footnotes in Table 6-6 for the minimum revisions of the console and diagnostic ROMs for each type of system. 6-26 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual There is no difference between MS62A memory modules and (xma2)s as far as interleaving is concerned. The console software that does the interleaving only recognizes the size difference (number of Mbytes) of the memory module. Memory ROM-based diagnostics function with both types of memory modules. However, since the (xma2) has an EEPROM and the MS62A memory module does not, the RBD does not test the EEPROM on the (xma2). The following (xma2) RBDs will not run on (xma2)s installed in Model 200, 300, or 400 systems. · SEADR Register Test · Block State Test · EEPROM Update Test Status messages will print on the console terminal stating that the diagnostic test does not run. MS65A Memory 6-27 Chapter 7 DWMBB I/O Adapter ------------------------------------------------------------ This chapter discusses the DWMBB adapter, the interface to an optional VAXBI I/O channel. Sections include: · Physical Description Physical Layout Specifications · Configuration Rules · Functional Description · Registers DWMBB I/O Adapter 7-1 7.1 DWMBB Physical Description 7.1.1 Physical Layout The (xbia) is an XMI module (T2018) with the standard XMI Corner, an XMI self-test OK LED indicator, IBUS drivers/receivers and transceivers, timeout logic, and a gate array that controls the (xbia). Most of the components on the (xbia) are surface- mounted. Figure 7-1: (XBIA_TITLE) 7-2 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual The (XBIB) is a standard VAXBI (T1043) module with a VAXBI Corner, including a BIIC interface chip, the primary interface between the VAXBI bus and the (XBIB) node logic, a clock driver, and a clock receiver. The (XBIB) gate array is used mostly for data path logic. The VAXBI self-test OK LED is on the VAXBI Corner, and the module self-test OK LED is at the module edge opposite the connector edge. Figure 7-2: (XBIB_TITLE) DWMBB I/O Adapter 7-3 7.1.2 Specifications The following specifications apply to the DWMBB modules. Table 7-1: DWMBB/A Specifications ------------------------------------------------------------ Parameter Description ------------------------------------------------------------ Module Number: T2018 Dimensions: 23.3 cm (9.2") H x 0.23 cm (0.093") W x 28.0 cm (11.0") D Temperature: Storage Range -40 o C to 66 o C (-40 o F to 151 o F) Operating Range 5 o C to 50 o C (41 o F to 122 o F) Relative Humidity: Storage and operating 10% to 95% noncondensing Altitude: Storage Up to 4.8 km (16,000 ft) Operating Up to 2.4 km (8000 ft) Current: 6A at +5V Power: 16W ------------------------------------------------------------ 7-4 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 7-2: DWMBB/B Specifications ------------------------------------------------------------ Parameter Description ------------------------------------------------------------ Module Number: T1043 Dimensions: 20.3 cm (8") H x 0.23 cm (0.093") W x 23.3 cm (9.2") D Temperature: Storage Range -40 o C to 66 o C (-40 o F to 151 o F) Operating Range 5 o C to 50 o C (41 o F to 122 o F) Relative Humidity: Storage and operating 10% to 95% noncondensing Altitude: Storage Up to 4.8 km (16,000 ft) Operating Up to 2.4 km (8000 ft) Current: 6A at +5V 10mA at -12V Power: 30W ------------------------------------------------------------ Table 7-3: (xbi_plus) Cables ------------------------------------------------------------ Part Number Description ------------------------------------------------------------ 17-01569-01 DWMBB to H7206-B power OK cable 17-01897-01 15' DWMBB cables for expander cabinet, from XMI slots 1, 2, 3, and 4 as needed (segments D and E) to VAXBI cages 2, 3, 4, and 5 (seg- ments D and E). Two per DWMBB. 17-01897-02 7" DWMBB cables, from XMI slot E (segments D and E) to VAXBI cage 1 slot 1 (segments D and E). Two per DWMBB. ------------------------------------------------------------ DWMBB I/O Adapter 7-5 7.2 (xbi_plus) Configuration Rules This section describes the configuration rules for the DWMBB/A module in the XMI card cage and for the DWMBB/B module in the VAXBI card cage. Figure 7-3: VAX 6000 Slot Numbers 7-6 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual (XBIA) modules are placed in the order shown in Table 7-4. Table 7-4: (xbi_plus) Configuration ------------------------------------------------------------ (XMI) Node No. VAXBI Channel Location ------------------------------------------------------------ E 1 System cabinet 1 2 Expander cabinet 2 3 Expander cabinet 3 4 Expander cabinet 4 5 Expander cabinet ------------------------------------------------------------ Configuration rules are as follows: · The first VAXBI channel is the 12-slot channel in the system cabinet. The DWMBB/A module is placed in XMI slot E; the corresponding DWMBB/B module is placed in the system VAXBI cage, slot 1 (the rightmost slot). See Figure 7-3. · Any additional VAXBI channels are 6-slot channels in the expander cabinet. The DWMBB/B module is placed in slot 1 of each. The corresponding DWMBB/A module is placed in the XMI slot listed in Table 7-4. DWMBB I/O Adapter 7-7 7.3 DWMBB Functional Description The (xbi_plus) adapter provides an informa- tion path between the (XMI) bus and I/O de- vices on the VAXBI bus. The (xbi_plus) con- sists of two modules: the (XBIA) and the (XBIB). The (XBIA) resides on the (XMI) bus, and the (XBIB) resides on the VAXBI bus. Four 30-pin cables, which make up the IBUS, connect the two modules. Figure 7-4: (XBI_TITLE) Block Diagram 7-8 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual The (XBIA) contains the (XMI) Corner, the register files, (XMI) required registers, (XBIA)- specific registers, page map registers, and the control sequencers for the (XMI) interface. The (XBIB) contains the BIIC interface chip, interconnect drivers, control sequencers to handle the control of the data transfer, status bits to and from the (XBIA) module's register files and the BIIC, (XBIB)-specific registers, decode logic for direct memory access (DMA) operation, and VAXBI clock-generation circuitry. The (XBIA) and (XBIB) modules are connected by four cables of 30 wires each. These 120 wires make up the IBUS, which transfers data and control information between the two modules. The (xbi_plus) uses I/O and DMA transactions to exchange information. I/O transactions originate from the (XYP) or (XRP) module(s) and are presented to the (xbi_plus) from the (XMI) bus with the processor as the (XMI) commander and the (xbi_plus) as the (XMI) responder. DMA transactions originate from VAXBI nodes that select the (xbi_plus) as the VAXBI slave. These are read or write transactions targeted to (XMI) memory space or are VAXBI-generated interrupt transactions that target a (xyp) or (XRP) module. For DMA transactions, the (xbi_ plus) is the (XMI) commander, and the (XMA) module is the (XMI) responder. The (xbi_plus) can be both a master and a slave on the VAXBI. As a master, it carries out transactions requested by its (XMI) devices. As a slave, it responds to VAXBI transactions that select its node. DWMBB I/O Adapter 7-9 7.4 (xbi_plus) Tests -- RBD 2 The (xbi_plus) ROM-based diagnostic, RBD 2, checks functions of both (xbi_plus) modules. RBD 2 tests the (xbi_plus) modules and can trace the subtests, pinpointing errors. Example 7-1: (xbi_plus) Tests -- RBD 2 >>> T/R ! Command to enter RBD monitor program RBD1> ! RBD monitor prompt, where 1 is the ! hexadecimal node number of the ! processor that is currently receiving ! your input. RBD1> ST2/TR E ! ! Runs the DWMBB RBD, testing ! the DWMBB at XMI node number E. Test ! results written to the console ! terminal: ;XBI_TEST 3.00 ; T0001 T0005 T0006 T0007 T0008 T0009 T0012 T0013 T0014 T0015 ; T0016 T0017 T0018 T0019 T0020 T0021 T0022 T0023 T0024 T0025 ; P " 1 8082 1 # ;000000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 RBD1> ST2/TR/T=1:26 E $ ! Runs the DWMBB RBD, testing ! the DWMBB at XMI node number E. Test ! results written to the console ! terminal: ;XBI_TEST 3.00 ; T0001 T0002 T0003 T0004 T0005 T0006 T0007 T0008 T0009 T0010 ; T0011 T0012 T0013 T0014 T0015 T0016 T0017 T0018 T0019 T0020 ; T0021 T0022 T0023 T0024 T0025 T0026 ; P 1 8082 1 ;000000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 7-10 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual The (xbi_plus) has no on-board self-test. The boot processor ROM code tests (xbi_plus)s during additional power-up tests. At power-up, the boot processor first sizes all (xbi_plus)s and then serially tests each one. ! When invoking RBD 2 from the monitor, the START command requires a parameter. This parameter is the XMI node number (hexadecimal) of the (xbia_plus) module of the (xbi_ plus) to be tested. " This diagnostic ran successfully. # One pass was completed. $ This command runs all the tests in RBD 2. DWMBB I/O Adapter 7-11 7.5 DWMBB Tests -- RBD 2 Subtests RBD 2 consists of 26 tests, as shown in Table 7-5. Table 7-5: (xbi_plus_title) RBD Tests ------------------------------------------------------------ Test Function Default ------------------------------------------------------------ T0001 DWMBB/A CSR Test Yes T0002 (XMI) Low Longword Parity Error Test No T0003 (XMI) High Longword Parity Error Test No T0004 (XMI) Function and ID Parity Error Test No T0005 (xbib_plus) CSR Test Yes T0006 BIIC VAXBI Loopback Transaction Test Yes T0007 BIIC VAXBI Transaction Test Yes T0008 DMA Test Yes T0009 DMA Buffer Test Yes T0010 XMI Parity Error Interrupt Test No T0011 Write Sequence Error Interrupt Test No T0012 CPU Buffer C/A Fetch Parity Error (Interrupt) Test Yes T0013 CPU Buffer Data Fetch Parity Error (Interrupt) Test Yes T0014 DMA Buffer Data Fetch Parity Error (Interrupt) Test Yes T0015 VAXBI Interlock Read Error (Interrupt) Test Yes T0016 DMA-A Buffer C/A Load Parity Error (Interrupt) Test Yes T0017 DMA-A Buffer Data Load Parity Error (IVINTR) Test Yes T0018 DMA-B Buffer C/A Load Parity Error (Interrupt) Test Yes T0019 DMA-B Buffer Data Load Parity Error (IVINTR) Test Yes T0020 CPU Buffer Data Load Parity Error (Interrupt) Test Yes T0021 BCI Parity Error Test Yes T0022 Nonexistent Memory (Interrupt) Test Yes T0023 CRD Error (Interrupt) Test Yes 7-12 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 7-5 (Cont.): (xbi_plus_title) RBD Tests ------------------------------------------------------------ Test Function Default ------------------------------------------------------------ T0024 VAXBI Interrupt Test Yes T0025 VAXBI IP Interrupt Test Yes T0026 No Stall Timeout Test Yes ------------------------------------------------------------ DWMBB I/O Adapter 7-13 7.6 (xbi_plus) Registers Two sets of registers are used by the (xbi_ plus) adapter: VAXBI registers (residing in the BIIC) and (xbi_plus) registers (residing on both mod- ules of the (xbi_plus)). The (xbi_ plus) registers include the (XMI) required registers and (xbi_plus)-specific registers ad- dressed in (xbi_plus) private space. Table 7-6: VAXBI Registers ------------------------------------------------------------ Name Mnemonic Address 1 ------------------------------------------------------------ Device Register DTYPE bb+00 VAXBI Control and Status Register VAXBICSR bb+04 Bus Error Register BER bb+08 Error Interrupt Control Register EINTRSCR bb+0C Interrupt Destination Register INTRDES bb+10 IPINTR Mask Register IPINTRMSK bb+14 Force-Bit IPINTR/STOP Destination Register FIPSDES bb+18 IPINTR Source Register IPINTRSRC bb+1C Starting Address Register SADR bb+20 Ending Address Register EADR bb+24 BCI Control and Status Register BCICSR bb+28 Write Status Register WSTAT bb+2C Force-Bit IPINTR/STOP Command Register FIPSCMD bb+30 User Interface Interrupt Control Register UINTRCSR bb+40 General Purpose Register 0 GPR0 bb+F0 General Purpose Register 1 GPR1 bb+F4 General Purpose Register 2 GPR2 bb+F8 General Purpose Register 3 GPR3 bb+FC ------------------------------------------------------------ 1 The abbreviation "bb" refers to the base address of a VAXBI node (the address of the first lo- cation of nodespace). ------------------------------------------------------------ 7-14 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table 7-6 lists the VAXBI registers. The VAXBI registers are described in Chapter 5 of the VAXBI Options Handbook. Table 7-7 lists the (xbi_plus) registers. Table 7-7: (xbi_plus) XMI Registers ------------------------------------------------------------ Name Mnemonic 1 Address 2 ------------------------------------------------------------ Device Register XDEV BB+00 Bus Error Register XBER BB+04 Failing Address Register XFADR BB+08 Responder Error Address Register AREAR BB+0C Error Summary Register AESR BB+10 Interrupt Mask Register AIMR BB+14 Implied Vector Interrupt Destination/Diagnostic Register AIVINTR BB+18 Diagnostic 1 Register ADG1 BB+1C Utility Register AUTLR BB+20 Control and Status Register ACSR BB+24 Return Vector Register ARVR BB+28 XMI Failing Address Extension Register XFAER BB+2C VAXBI Error Address Register ABEAR BB+30 Control and Status Register BCSR BB+40 Error Summary Register BESR BB+44 Interrupt Destination Register BIDR BB+48 Timeout Address Register BTIM BB+4C Vector Offset Register BVOR BB+50 Vector Register BVR BB+54 Diagnostic Control Register 1 BDCR1 BB+58 Reserved Register BRSVD BB+5C ------------------------------------------------------------ 1 If the first letter of the mnemonic is "X" or "A," it indicates that the register re- sides on the (XBIA) module; a first letter of "B" indicates that the register re- sides on the (XBIB) module. 2 The abbreviation "BB" refers to the base address of an (XMI) node (the ad- dress of the first location of nodespace). DWMBB I/O Adapter 7-15 Table 7-7 (Cont.): (xbi_plus) XMI Registers ------------------------------------------------------------ Name Mnemonic 1 Address 2 ------------------------------------------------------------ Page Map Register (first location) . . . PMR BB+200 Page Map Register (last location) PMR BB+401FC ------------------------------------------------------------ 7-16 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Appendix A Console Error Messages for Model 300 ------------------------------------------------------------ Table A-1 lists messages ?02 through ?1F which appear when the processor halts and the console gains control. Each message is followed by a "PC = xxxxxxxx" message giving the address where the processor was executing when it halted; these messages designate the reasons for the halt. Table A-2 lists the standard console error messages ?20 through ?7C. Table A-1: Model 300 Console Error Messages Indicating Halt ------------------------------------------------------------ Error Message Meaning ------------------------------------------------------------ ?02 External halt. ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ CTRL-P ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ or STOP command. ?04 Interrupt stack not valid. Interrupt stack pointer contained an in- valid address. ?05 Machine check during exception. A machine check occurred while han- dling another error condition. ?06 Halt instruction executed. The CPU executed a Halt instruc- tion. ?07 SCB vector bits <1:0> = 11. An interrupt or exception vector in the System Control Block contained an in- valid address. ?08 SCB vector bits <1:0> = 10. An interrupt or exception vector in the System Control Block contained an in- valid address. ?0A CHMx executed while on interrupt stack. A change-mode instruction was issued while executing on the interrupt stack. ?0B CHMx to interrupt stack. The System Control Block vector for a change-mode instruction indicated ser- vice on the interrupt stack. ?0C SCB read error. The System Control Block was not acces- sible in memory. ?10 ACV or TNV during machine check. An access violation or translation-not- valid error occurred while handling an- other error condition. Console Error Messages for Model 300 A-1 Table A-1 (Cont.): Model 300 Console Error Messages Indicat- ing Halt ------------------------------------------------------------ Error Message Meaning ------------------------------------------------------------ ?11 ACV or TNV during KSP not valid. An access violation or translation-not- valid error occurred while handling an- other error condition. ?12 Machine check during machine check. A machine check occurred while han- dling another error condition. ?13 Machine check during KSP not valid. A machine check occurred while han- dling another error condition. ?19 PSL <26:24>= 101 during interrupt or exception. An exception or interrupt occurred while on the interrupt stack but not in ker- nel mode. ?1A PSL <26:24>= 110 during interrupt or exception. An exception or interrupt occurred while on the interrupt stack but not in ker- nel mode. ?1B PSL <26:24>= 111 during interrupt or exception. An exception or interrupt occurred while on the interrupt stack but not in ker- nel mode. ?1D PSL <26:24> = 101 during REI. An REI instruction attempted to re- store a PSL with an invalid com- bination of access mode and inter- rupt stack bits. ?1E PSL <26:24> = 110 during REI. An REI instruction attempted to re- store a PSL with an invalid com- bination of access mode and inter- rupt stack bits. ?1F PSL <26:24> = 111 during REI. An REI instruction attempted to re- store a PSL with an invalid com- bination of access mode and inter- rupt stack bits. ------------------------------------------------------------ A-2 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table A-2: Model 300 Standard Console Error Messages ------------------------------------------------------------ Error Message Meaning ------------------------------------------------------------ ?20 Illegal memory reference. An attempt was made to reference a vir- tual address (/V) that is either un- mapped or is protected against access un- der the current PSL. ?21 Illegal command. The command was not recognized, con- tained the wrong number of parame- ters, or contained unrecognized or inap- propriate qualifiers. ?22 Illegal address. The specified address was recognized as being invalid, for example, a general pur- pose register number greater than 15. ?23 Value is too large. A parameter or qualifier value con- tained too many digits. ?24 Conflicting qualifiers. A command specified recognized quali- fiers that are illegal in combination. ?25 Checksum did not match. The checksum calculated for a block of X command data did not match the check- sum received. ?26 Halted. The processor is currently halted. ?27 Item was not found. The item requested in a FIND com- mand could not be found. ?28 Timeout while waiting for characters. The X command failed to receive a full block of data within the timeout pe- riod. ?29 Machine check accessing memory. Either the specified address is not im- plemented by any hardware in the sys- tem, or an attempt was made to write a read-only address, for example, the ad- dress of the 33rd Mbyte of mem- ory on a 32-Mbyte system. ?2A Unexpected machine check or interrupt. A valid operation within the console caused a machine check or interrupt. ?2B Command is not implemented. The command is not implemented by this console. ?2C Unexpected exception. A valid operation within the console caused an exception. Console Error Messages for Model 300 A-3 Table A-2 (Cont.): Model 300 Standard Console Error Mes- sages ------------------------------------------------------------ Error Message Meaning ------------------------------------------------------------ ?2D For Secondary Processor n This message is a preface to sec- ond message describing some error re- lated to a secondary processor. This mes- sage indicates which secondary proces- sor is involved. ?2E Specified node is not an I/O adapter. The referenced node is incapable of per- forming I/O or did not pass its self- test. ?30 Write to Z command target has timed out. The target node of the Z command is not responding. ?31 Z connection terminated by ^P. A CTRL/P was typed on the key- board to terminate a Z command. ?32 Your node is already part of a Z connec- tion. You cannot issue a Z command while exe- cuting a Z command. ?33 Z connection successfully started. You have requested a Z connection to a valid node. ?34 Specified target already has a Z connec- tion. The target node was the target of a previ- ous Z connection that was improperly ter- minated. Reset the system to clear this condition. ?36 Command too long. The command length exceeds 80 charac- ters. ?37 Explicit interleave list is bad. Configuring all arrays uninterleaved. The list of memory arrays for ex- plicit interleave includes no nodes that are actually memory arrays. All ar- rays found in the system are config- ured. ?38 Waiting for a CR to terminate the com- mand. The command has not yet been is- sued by a carriage return. ?39 Console patches are not useable. The console patch area in EEPROM is corrupted or contains a patch revi- sion that is incompatible with the con- sole ROM. ?3B Error encountered during I/O opera- tion. An I/O adapter returned an error status while the console boot primitive was per- forming I/O. A-4 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table A-2 (Cont.): Model 300 Standard Console Error Mes- sages ------------------------------------------------------------ Error Message Meaning ------------------------------------------------------------ ?3C Secondary processor not in console mode. The primary processor console needed to communicate with a secondary proces- sor, but the secondary processor was not in console mode. STOP the node or re- set the system to clear this condi- tion. ?3D Error initializing I/O device. A console boot primitive needed to per- form I/O, but could not initialize the I/O adapter. ?3E Timeout while sending message to secondary. A secondary processor failed to re- spond to a message sent from the pri- mary. The primary sends such mes- sages to perform console functions on sec- ondary processors. ?3F Key switch must be at "Update" to update EEPROM. A SET command needs to update the EEP- ROM, but the key switch is not set to al- low updates. ?40 Specified node is not a bus adapter. A command that accesses a VAXBI node specified an XMI node that was not a bus adapter. ?41 Invalid terminal speed. The SET TERMINAL command speci- fied an unsupported baud rate. ?42 Unable to initialize node. The INITIALIZE command failed to re- set the specified node. ?43 Processor is not enabled to BOOT or START. As a result of a SET CPU/NOENABLE command, the processor is disabled from leaving console mode. ?44 Unable to stop node. The STOP command failed to halt the specified node. ?45 Memory interleave set is inconsistent: n n ... The listed nodes do not form a valid mem- ory interleave set. One or more of the nodes might not be a memory ar- ray, or the set could contain an in- valid number of members. Each listed ar- ray that is a valid memory will be config- ured uninterleaved. Console Error Messages for Model 300 A-5 Table A-2 (Cont.): Model 300 Standard Console Error Mes- sages ------------------------------------------------------------ Error Message Meaning ------------------------------------------------------------ ?46 Insufficient working memory for normal op- eration. Less than 256 Kbytes per processor of working memory were found. There is in- sufficient memory for the console to func- tion normally or for the operating sys- tem to boot. ?47 Uncorrectable memory errors--long mem- ory test must be performed. A memory array contains an unrecov- erable error. The console must per- form a slow test to locate all the failing lo- cations. ?49 Memories not interleaved due to uncorrectable errors: The listed arrays would normally have been interleaved (by default or explicit re- quest). Because one or more of them con- tained unrecoverable errors, this inter- leave set will not be constructed. ?4A Internal logic error in console. The console encountered a theoreti- cally impossible condition. ?4B Invalid node for Z command. The target of a Z command must be a CPU or an I/O adapter and must not be the pri- mary processor. ?4C Invalid node for new primary. The SET CPU command failed when at- tempting to make the specified node the primary processor. ?4D Specified node is not a processor. The specified node is not a processor, as re- quired by the command. ?4E System serial number has not been initialized. No CPU in the system contains a valid system serial number. ?4F System serial number not initialized on primary processor. The primary processor has an uninitial- ized system serial number. All other pro- cessors in the system contain a valid se- rial number. ?50 Secondary processor returned bad response message. A secondary processor returned an un- intelligible response to a request made by the console on the primary proces- sor. ?51 ROM revision mismatch. Secondary processor has revision x.y. The revision of console ROM of a sec- ondary processor does not match the pri- mary. A-6 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table A-2 (Cont.): Model 300 Standard Console Error Mes- sages ------------------------------------------------------------ Error Message Meaning ------------------------------------------------------------ ?52 EEPROM header is corrupted. The EEPROM header has been cor- rupted. The EEPROM must be re- stored from the TK tape drive. ?53 EEPROM revision mismatch. Secondary processor has revision x.y/x.y. A secondary processor has a differ- ent revision of EEPROM or has a dif- ferent set of EEPROM patches in- stalled. ?54 Failed to locate EEPROM area. The EEPROM did not contain a set of data required by the console. The EEP- ROM may be corrupted. ?55 Console parameters on secondary proces- sor do not match primary. Console parameters do not match on the primary and secondary processors. ?56 EEPROM area checksum error. A portion of the EEPROM is corrupted. It may be necessary to reload the EEP- ROM from the TK tape drive. ?57 Saved boot specifications on secondary pro- cessor do not match primary. Saved boot specifications do not match on the primary and secondary proces- sors. ?58 Invalid unit number. A BOOT or SET BOOT command speci- fies a unit number that is not a valid hex- adecimal number between 0 and FF. ?59 System serial number mismatch. Secondary processor has xxxxxxxx. The indicated serial number of a sec- ondary processor does not match the pri- mary. ?5A Unknown type of boot device. The console program does not have a boot primitive to support the specified type of device or the device could not be ac- cessed to determine its type. ?5B No HELP is available. The HELP command is not supported when the console language is set to Inter- national. ?5C No such boot spec found. The specified saved boot specification was not found in the EEPROM. ?5D Saved boot spec table full. The maximum number of saved boot spec- ifications has already been stored. Console Error Messages for Model 300 A-7 Table A-2 (Cont.): Model 300 Standard Console Error Mes- sages ------------------------------------------------------------ Error Message Meaning ------------------------------------------------------------ ?5E EEPROM header version mismatch. The primary and a secondary proces- sor have different versions of the EEP- ROM. The requested operation can- not be performed. ?5F Bad transfer length. The primary processor attempted to send EEPROM data to a secondary proces- sor using an invalid length. ?60 EEPROM header or area has bad format. All or part of the EEPROM contains in- consistent data and is probably cor- rupted. Reload the EEPROM from the TK tape. ?61 Illegal node number. The specified node number is invalid. ?62 Unable to locate console tape device. The console could not locate the I/O adapter that controls the TK tape. ?63 Operation only applies to secondary processors. The command can only be directed at a secondary processor. ?64 Insufficient memory to buffer EEPROM image. The SAVE, RESTORE, and PATCH EEP- ROM commands require working mem- ory, but not enough was found. ?65 Validation of EEPROM tape image failed. The image on tape is corrupted or is not the result of a SAVE EEP- ROM command. The image cannot be re- stored. ?66 Read of EEPROM image from tape failed. The EEPROM image was not success- fully read from tape. ?67 Validation of local EEPROM failed. For a PATCH EEPROM operation, the EEPROM must first contain a valid im- age before it can be patched. For a RE- STORE EEPROM operation, the im- age was written back to EEPROM but could not be read back success- fully. ?68 EEPROM not changed. The EEPROM contents were not changed. ?69 EEPROM changed successfully. The EEPROM contents were success- fully patched or restored. A-8 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table A-2 (Cont.): Model 300 Standard Console Error Mes- sages ------------------------------------------------------------ Error Message Meaning ------------------------------------------------------------ ?6A Error changing EEPROM. An error occurred in writing to the EEP- ROM. The EEPROM contents may be cor- rupted. ?6B EEPROM saved to tape successfully. The EEPROM contents were success- fully written to the TK tape. ?6C EEPROM not saved to tape. The EEPROM contents were not com- pletely written to the TK tape. ?6D EEPROM Revision = x.x/y.y. The EEPROM contents are at revi- sion x.x with revision y.y patches. ?6E Major revision mismatch between tape image and EEPROM. The TK tape contains an EEPROM im- age with a major revision different from that found in the EEPROM. The im- age cannot be restored. ?6F Tape image Revision = x.x/y.y. The EEPROM image on the TK tape is at revision x.x with revision y.y patches. ?74 CONSOLE_LIMIT value too small for proper operation. Value ignored. ?75 Error writing to tape. Tape may be write- locked. ?83 See Loading system software below. ?84 See Failure below. ?85 See Restarting system software below. ?B0 See Initializing system below. Failure. The console failed in a restart or boot op- eration. Shows as ?84 in SET LAN- GUAGE INTERNATIONAL mode. Initializing system. The console is resetting the system in re- sponse to a BOOT command. Shows as ?B0 in SET LANGUAGE INTERNA- TIONAL mode. Console Error Messages for Model 300 A-9 Table A-2 (Cont.): Model 300 Standard Console Error Mes- sages ------------------------------------------------------------ Error Message Meaning ------------------------------------------------------------ Loading system software. The console is attempting to load the oper- ating system in response to a BOOT com- mand, power-up, or restart failure. Shows as ?83 in SET LANGUAGE INTERNA- TIONAL mode. Node: n ?xx Error message ?xx was generated on sec- ondary processor n and was passed to the primary processor to be dis- played. Restarting system software. The console is attempting to restart the in- memory copy of the operating sys- tem following a power-up or serious er- ror. Shows as ?85 in SET LANGUAGE IN- TERNATIONAL mode. ------------------------------------------------------------ A-10 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Appendix B Console Error Messages for Model 400 ------------------------------------------------------------ Table B-1 lists Model 400 messages that appear when the processor halts and the console gains control. Most messages are followed by: · PC = xxxxxxxx -- program counter = address at which the processor halted or the exception occurred · PSL = xxxxxxxx -- processor status longword = contents of the register · -SP = xxxxxxxx -- -SP is one of the following: ESP executive stack pointer ISP interrupt stack pointer KSP kernel stack pointer SSP supervisor stack pointer USP user stack pointer Table B-2 lists other console error messages. Table B-1: Model 400 Console Error Messages Indicating Halt ------------------------------------------------------------ Error Message Meaning ------------------------------------------------------------ ?02 External halt (CTRL/P, break, or exter- nal halt). ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ CTRL/P ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ or STOP command. ?03 Power-up halt. System has powered up, had a system re- set, or an XMI node reset. ?04 Interrupt stack not valid during excep- tion processing. Interrupt stack pointer contained an in- valid address. ?05 Machine check occurred during excep- tion processing. A machine check occurred while han- dling another error condition. ?06 Halt instruction executed in kernel mode. The CPU executed a Halt instruc- tion. ?07 SCB vector bits <1:0> = 11. An interrupt or exception vector in the System Control Block contained an in- valid address. Console Error Messages for Model 400 B-1 Table B-1 (Cont.): Model 400 Console Error Messages Indicat- ing Halt ------------------------------------------------------------ Error Message Meaning ------------------------------------------------------------ ?08 SCB vector bits <1:0> = 10. An interrupt or exception vector in the System Control Block contained an in- valid address. ?0A CHMx executed while on interrupt stack. A change-mode instruction was issued while executing on the interrupt stack. ?10 ACV/TNV occurred during machine check processing. An access violation or translation-not- valid error occurred while handling an- other error condition. ?11 ACV/TNV occurred during kernel-stack-not- valid processing. An access violation or translation-not- valid error occurred while handling an- other error condition. ?12 Machine check occurred during machine check processing. A machine check occurred while process- ing a machine check. ?13 Machine check occurred during kernel-stack- not-valid processing. A machine check occurred while han- dling another error condition. ?19 PSL <26:24>= 101 during interrupt or exception. An exception or interrupt occurred while on the interrupt stack but not in ker- nel mode. ?1A PSL <26:24>= 110 during interrupt or exception. An exception or interrupt occurred while on the interrupt stack but not in ker- nel mode. ?1B PSL <26:24>= 111 during interrupt or exception. An exception or interrupt occurred while on the interrupt stack but not in ker- nel mode. ?1D PSL <26:24> = 101 during REI. An REI instruction attempted to re- store a PSL with an invalid com- bination of access mode and inter- rupt stack bits. ?1E PSL <26:24> = 110 during REI. An REI instruction attempted to re- store a PSL with an invalid com- bination of access mode and inter- rupt stack bits. ?1F PSL <26:24> = 111 during REI. An REI instruction attempted to re- store a PSL with an invalid com- bination of access mode and inter- rupt stack bits. ------------------------------------------------------------ B-2 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table B-2: Model 400 Standard Console Error Messages ------------------------------------------------------------ Error Message Meaning ------------------------------------------------------------ ?20 Illegal memory reference. An attempt was made to reference a vir- tual address (/V) that is either un- mapped or is protected against access un- der the current PSL. ?21 Illegal command. The command was not recognized, con- tained the wrong number of parame- ters, or contained unrecognized or inap- propriate qualifiers. ?22 Illegal address. The specified address was recognized as being invalid, for example, a general pur- pose register number greater than 15. ?23 Value is too large. A parameter or qualifier value con- tained too many digits. ?24 Conflicting qualifiers. A command specified recognized quali- fiers that are illegal in combination. ?25 Checksum did not match. The checksum calculated for a block of X command data did not match the check- sum received. ?26 Halted. The processor is currently halted. ?27 Item was not found. The item requested in a FIND com- mand could not be found. ?28 Timeout while waiting for characters. The X command failed to receive a full block of data within the timeout pe- riod. ?29 Machine check accessing memory. Either the specified address is not im- plemented by any hardware in the sys- tem, or an attempt was made to write a read-only address, for example, the ad- dress of the 33rd Mbyte of mem- ory on a 32-Mbyte system. ?2A Unexpected machine check or interrupt. A valid operation within the console caused a machine check or interrupt. ?2B Command is not implemented. The command is not implemented by this console. ?2C Unexpected exception. An attempt was made to examine ei- ther a nonexistent IPR or an unimple- mented register in RSSC address range (20140000--20140800). Console Error Messages for Model 400 B-3 Table B-2 (Cont.): Model 400 Standard Console Error Mes- sages ------------------------------------------------------------ Error Message Meaning ------------------------------------------------------------ ?2D For Secondary Processor n. This message is a preface to sec- ond message describing some error re- lated to a secondary processor. This mes- sage indicates which secondary proces- sor is involved. ?2E Specified node is not an I/O adapter. The referenced node is incapable of per- forming I/O or did not pass its self- test. ?30 Write to Z command target has timed out. The target node of the Z command is not responding. ?31 Z connection terminated by ^P. A CTRL/P was typed on the key- board to terminate a Z command. ?32 Your node is already part of a Z connection. You cannot issue a Z command while exe- cuting a Z command. ?33 Z connection successfully started. You have requested a Z connection to a valid node. ?34 Specified target already has a Z connection. The target node was the target of a previ- ous Z connection that was improperly ter- minated. Reset the system to clear this condition. ?36 Command too long. The command length exceeds 80 charac- ters. ?37 Explicit interleave list is bad. Configuring all arrays uninterleaved. The list of memory arrays for ex- plicit interleave includes no nodes that are actually memory arrays. All ar- rays found in the system are config- ured. ?39 Console patches are not usable. The console patch area in EEPROM is corrupted or contains a patch revi- sion that is incompatible with the con- sole ROM. ?3B Error encountered during I/O operation. An I/O adapter returned an error status while the console boot primitive was per- forming I/O. B-4 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table B-2 (Cont.): Model 400 Standard Console Error Mes- sages ------------------------------------------------------------ Error Message Meaning ------------------------------------------------------------ ?3C Secondary processor not in console mode. The primary processor console needed to communicate with a secondary proces- sor, but the secondary processor was not in console mode. STOP the node or re- set the system to clear this condi- tion. ?3D Error initializing I/O device. A console boot primitive needed to per- form I/O, but could not initialize the I/O adapter. ?3E Timeout while sending message to secondary processor. A secondary processor failed to re- spond to a message sent from the pri- mary. The primary sends such mes- sages to perform console functions on sec- ondary processors. ?3F Microcode power-up self-test failed in REX520. Model 400 CPU chip failed its mi- crocoded self-test. ?40 Key switch must be at "Update" to update EEPROM. A SET command was issued, but the key switch was not set to allow up- dates to the EEPROM. ?41 Specified node is not a bus adapter. A command to access a VAXBI node spec- ified an XMI node that was not a bus adapter. ?42 Invalid terminal speed. The SET TERMINAL command speci- fied an unsupported baud rate. ?43 Unable to initialize node. The INITIALIZE command failed to re- set the specified node. ?44 Processor is not enabled to BOOT or START. As a result of a SET CPU/NOENABLE command, the processor is disabled from leaving console mode. ?45 Unable to stop node. The STOP command failed to halt the specified node. ?46 Memory interleave set is inconsistent: n n ... The listed nodes do not form a valid mem- ory interleave set. One or more of the nodes might not be a mem- ory array or might be of a differ- ent size, or the set could contain an in- valid number of members. Each listed ar- ray that is a valid memory will be config- ured uninterleaved. Console Error Messages for Model 400 B-5 Table B-2 (Cont.): Model 400 Standard Console Error Mes- sages ------------------------------------------------------------ Error Message Meaning ------------------------------------------------------------ ?47 Insufficient working memory for normal op- eration. Less than 256 Kbytes per processor of working memory were found. There is in- sufficient memory for the console to func- tion normally or for the operating sys- tem to boot. ?48 Uncorrectable memory errors--long mem- ory test must be performed. A Model 400 memory array contains an unrecoverable error. The con- sole must perform a slow test to lo- cate all the failing locations. ?49 Memory cannot be initialized. The specified operation was attempted and prevented. ?4A Memories not interleaved due to uncorrectable errors: The listed arrays would normally have been interleaved (by default or explicit re- quest). Because one or more of them con- tained unrecoverable errors, this inter- leave set will not be constructed. ?4B Internal logic error in console. The console encountered a theoreti- cally impossible condition. ?4C Invalid node for Z command. The target of a Z command must be a CPU or an I/O adapter and must not be the pri- mary processor. ?4D Invalid node for new primary. The SET CPU command failed when at- tempting to make the specified node the primary processor. ?4E Specified node is not a processor. The specified node is not a processor, as re- quired by the command. ?4F System serial number has not been initialized. No CPU in the system contains a valid system serial number. ?50 System serial number not initialized on primary processor. The primary processor has an uninitial- ized system serial number. All other pro- cessors in the system contain a valid se- rial number. ?51 Secondary processor returned bad response message. A secondary processor returned an un- intelligible response to a request made by the console on the primary proces- sor. B-6 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table B-2 (Cont.): Model 400 Standard Console Error Mes- sages ------------------------------------------------------------ Error Message Meaning ------------------------------------------------------------ ?52 ROM revision mismatch. Secondary processor has revision x.xx. The revision of console ROM of a sec- ondary processor does not match that of the primary. ?53 EEPROM header is corrupted. The EEPROM header has been cor- rupted. The EEPROM must be re- stored from the TK tape drive. ?54 EEPROM revision mismatch. Secondary processor has revision x.xx/y.yy. A secondary processor has a differ- ent revision of EEPROM or has a dif- ferent set of EEPROM patches in- stalled. ?55 Failed to locate EEPROM area. The EEPROM did not contain a set of data required by the console. The EEP- ROM may be corrupted. ?56 Console parameters on secondary proces- sor do not match primary. The console parameters are not the same for all processors . ?57 EEPROM area checksum error. A portion of the EEPROM is corrupted. It may be necessary to reload the EEP- ROM from the TK tape drive. ?58 Saved boot specifications on secondary pro- cessor do not match primary. The saved boot specifications are not the same for all processors. ?59 Invalid unit number. A BOOT or SET BOOT command speci- fied a unit number that is not a valid hex- adecimal number between 0 and FF. ?5A System serial number mismatch. Secondary processor has xxxxxxxx. The indicated serial number of a sec- ondary processor does not match that of the primary. ?5B Unknown type of boot device. The console program does not have a boot primitive to support the specified type of device or the device could not be ac- cessed to determine its type. ?5C No HELP is available. The HELP command is not supported when the console language is set to Inter- national. ?5D No such boot spec found. The specified boot specification was not found in the EEPROM. ?5E Saved boot spec table full. The maximum number of saved boot spec- ifications has already been stored. Console Error Messages for Model 400 B-7 Table B-2 (Cont.): Model 400 Standard Console Error Mes- sages ------------------------------------------------------------ Error Message Meaning ------------------------------------------------------------ ?5F EEPROM header version mismatch. Processors have different versions of EEP- ROMs. ?61 EEPROM header or area has bad format. All or part of the EEPROM contains in- consistent data and is probably cor- rupted. Reload the EEPROM from the TK tape. ?62 Illegal node number. The specified node number is invalid. ?63 Unable to locate console tape device. The console could not locate the I/O adapter that controls the TK tape. ?64 Operation only applies to secondary processors. The command can only be directed at a secondary processor. ?65 Operation not allowed from secondary processor. A secondary processor cannot perform this operation. ?66 Validation of EEPROM tape image failed. The image on tape is corrupted or is not the result of a SAVE EEP- ROM command. The image cannot be re- stored. ?67 Read of EEPROM image from tape failed. The EEPROM image was not success- fully read from tape. ?68 Validation of local EEPROM failed. For a PATCH EEPROM operation, the EEPROM must first contain a valid im- age before it can be patched. For a RE- STORE EEPROM operation, the im- age was written back to EEPROM but could not be read back success- fully. ?69 EEPROM not changed. The EEPROM contents were not changed. ?6A EEPROM changed successfully. The EEPROM contents were success- fully patched or restored. ?6B Error changing EEPROM. An error occurred in writing to the EEP- ROM. The EEPROM contents may be cor- rupted. ?6C EEPROM saved to tape successfully. The EEPROM contents were success- fully written to the TK tape. ?6D EEPROM not saved to tape. The EEPROM contents were not com- pletely written to the TK tape. B-8 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table B-2 (Cont.): Model 400 Standard Console Error Mes- sages ------------------------------------------------------------ Error Message Meaning ------------------------------------------------------------ ?6E EEPROM Revision = x.xx/y.yy. The EEPROM contents are at revi- sion x.xx with revision y.yy patches. ?6F Major revision mismatch between tape image and EEPROM. The major revision of tape and EEP- ROM do not match. The requested opera- tion cannot be performed. ?70 Tape image Revision = x.xx/y.yy. The EEPROM image on the TK tape is at revision x.xx with revision y.yy patches. ?73 System serial number updated. The EEPROM has been updated with the correct system serial number. ?74 System serial number not updated. The EEPROM has not been changed. ?75 /CONSOLE_LIMIT value too small for proper operation. Value ignored. No change has been made. ?76 Error writing to tape. Tape may be write-locked. Tape has not been written. Check to see if tape is write-locked. ?77 CCA not accessible or corrupted. Attempt to find the console communi- cations area (CCA) failed. The con- sole then builds a local CCA, which does not allow for interprocessor communica- tion. ?78 Vector module configuration error at node n The console detected a vector module con- figuration error. Problem can be that the vector node number is not one greater than the scalar CPU or that the mod- ule to the left of a vector proces- sor is not a memory module. ?79 Vector synchronization error. The console could not synchronize with the vector processor on a console en- try. The Busy bit in the Vector Pro- cessor Status Register remained set af- ter a timeout, or a vector processor er- ror occurred. ?7A No vector module associated with CPU at specified node. No vector module is in the slot to the left of the specified CPU, or the VIB cable ei- ther is not attached or is bad. ?7B An error occurred while accessing the vec- tor module. Attempt to access VCR, VLR, or VMR reg- isters failed. Console Error Messages for Model 400 B-9 Table B-2 (Cont.): Model 400 Standard Console Error Mes- sages ------------------------------------------------------------ Error Message Meaning ------------------------------------------------------------ ?7C I/O adapter configuration error at node n The I/O adapter at node n is configured im- properly. ?7D Vector module is disabled--check KA64A re- vision at XMI node n The vector module is attached to a KA64A module that is not at the revision level re- quired. ?83 Loading system software. 1 The console is attempting to load the oper- ating system in response to a BOOT com- mand, power-up, or restart failure. ?84 Failure. 1 An operation did not complete success- fully. Should be issued with another mes- sage to clarify failure. ?85 Restarting system software. 1 The console is attempting to restart the in- memory copy of the operating sys- tem following a power-up or serious er- ror. ?A0 Initializing system. 1 The console is resetting the system in re- sponse to a BOOT command. ?A6 Console halting after unexpected ma- chine check or exception. 1 The console executed a Halt instruc- tion to reset the console state after pro- cessing an unexpected machine check. ?A7 RCSR is set. Local CCA must be built. When the bit is set, writes to mem- ory are disabled. The Model 400 pro- cessor must then build a CCA in lo- cal memory. Main memory cannot be writ- ten to or accessed with interlocked instruc- tions. ?A8 Bootstrap failed due to previous error. 1 The previous attempt to bootstrap the sys- tem failed. ?A9 Restart failed due to previous error. 1 The previous attempt to restart the sys- tem failed. Node n: ?xx Error message ?xx was generated on sec- ondary processor n and was passed to the primary processor to be dis- played. ------------------------------------------------------------ 1 No numbered prefix appears with these messages in English language mode. These num- bers are used for these messages in International mode. B-10 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Table B-2 (Cont.): Model 400 Standard Console Error Mes- sages ------------------------------------------------------------ Error Message Meaning ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ Console Error Messages for Model 400 B-11 Appendix C EEPROM Mismatches and the UPDATE Command ------------------------------------------------------------ Table C-1 shows the results of trying to update processor modules from primary processors that have different ROM revisions from the secondary being updated. Table C-1: UPDATE Results on EEPROM Mismatches ------------------------------------------------------------ Primary ROM Revision Secondary ROM Revision Results after UPDATE issued ------------------------------------------------------------ (xrp) ROM Revisions ------------------------------------------------------------ 1.0 2.0 Processor EEPROM corrupted, but still powers up. 1.0 3.0 Processor EEPROM corrupted, but still powers up. 2.0 1.0 Use EVUCA for updates to secondary EEPROM. Update not allowed. 2.0 3.0 Use EVUCA for updates to secondary EEPROM. Update not allowed. 3.0 1.0 Use EVUCA for updates to secondary EEPROM. Update not allowed. 3.0 2.0 Use EVUCA for updates to secondary EEPROM. Update not allowed. ------------------------------------------------------------ (xyp) ROM Revisions ------------------------------------------------------------ 4.1 6.0 Processor updated. Power-up tests broken. Processor will not be recognized. 6.0 4.1 Use EVUCA for updates to secondary EEPROM. Update not allowed. EEPROM Mismatches and the UPDATE Command C-1 Table C-1 (Cont.): UPDATE Results on EEPROM Mismatches ------------------------------------------------------------ Primary ROM Revision Secondary ROM Revision Results after UPDATE issued ------------------------------------------------------------ KA62A ROM Revisions ------------------------------------------------------------ 3.0 5.0 Processor updated. Power-up tests broken. Processor will not be recognized. 5.0 3.0 Use EVUCA for updates to secondary EEPROM. Update not allowed. ------------------------------------------------------------ C-2 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Appendix D Control Flags for Booting ------------------------------------------------------------ With the console BOOT command, you can control various phases of booting by setting bits in General Purpose Register R5: BOOT /R5:n where n is in hexadecimal notation. For example, to set bit 4 in R5 when booting, you would enter: BOOT /R5:10 The R5 bit functions are defined by VMB and by the operating system. The value -1 in R5 is reserved for Digital. Table D-1: R5 Bit Functions for VMS ------------------------------------------------------------ Bit Function ------------------------------------------------------------ 0 Conversational boot. The secondary bootstrap program, SYSBOOT, prompts you for system parameters at the console terminal. 1 Debug. If this flag bit is set, the operating system maps the code for the XDELTA debugger into the system page tables of the running operating sys- tem. 2 Initial breakpoint. If this flag bit is set, VMS executes a breakpoint (BPT) in- struction early in the bootstrapping process. 3 Secondary boot from boot block. The secondary boot is a single 512- byte block whose logical block number is specified in General Purpose Regis- ter R4. 4 Boots the VAX Diagnostic Supervisor. The secondary loader is an image called DI- AGBOOT.EXE. 5 Boot breakpoint. This stops the primary and secondary loaders with a break- point (BPT) instruction before testing memory. Control Flags for Booting D-1 Table D-1 (Cont.): R5 Bit Functions for VMS ------------------------------------------------------------ Bit Function ------------------------------------------------------------ 6 Image header. The transfer address of the secondary loader im- age comes from the image header for that file. If this flag is not set, con- trol shifts to the first byte of the secondary loader. 8 File name. VMB prompts for the name of a secondary loader. 9 Halt before transfer. VMB executes a HALT instruction before transferring con- trol to the secondary loader. 13 No effect, since console program tests memory. 15 Reserved for the VAX Diagnostic Supervisor. 16 Do not discard CRD pages. 31:28 Specifies the top-level directory number for system disks. ------------------------------------------------------------ Table D-2: R5 Bit Functions for ULTRIX ------------------------------------------------------------ Bit Function ------------------------------------------------------------ 0 Forces ULTRIXBOOT to prompt the user for an image name (the default is VMU- NIX). 1 Boots the ULTRIX kernel image in single-user mode. 3 Must be set, and R4 must be zero. 16 Must be set. ------------------------------------------------------------ D-2 VAX 6000 Models 300 and 400 Service Manual Glossary ------------------------------------------------------------ Adapter A node that interfaces other buses, communication lines, or peripheral devices to the (XMI) bus or the VAXBI bus. Address space The 1 terabyte of physical address space that the XMI bus is capable of supporting; currently the XMI bus supports 1 gigabyte of physical memory. Asymmetric multiprocessing A multiprocessing configuration in which the processors are not equal in their ability to execute operating system code. In general, a single processor is designated as the primary, or master, processor; other processors are the slaves. The slave processors are limited to performing certain tasks, whereas the master processor can perform all system tasks. Contrast with Symmetric multiprocessing. Bandwidth The data transfer rate measured in information units transferred per unit of time (for example, Mbytes per second). Boot device Contains the bootblock and typically also contains the virtual memory boot program (VMB). A VAX 6000 series system can be booted from one of four boot devices: the console load device, a local system disk, a disk connected to the system through a CI adapter, or a disk connected to the system through the Ethernet. Boot primitives Small programs stored in ROM on each processor with the console program. Boot primitives read the bootblock from boot devices. There is a boot primitive for each type of boot device. Boot processor The CPU module that boots the operating system and communicates with the console. Glossary-1 Bootblock Block zero on the system disk; it contains the block number where the virtual memory boot (VMB) program is located on the system disk and contains a program that, with the boot primitive, reads VMB from the system load device into memory. CIBCA VAXBI CI port interface; connects a system to a Star Coupler. CIXCD XMI CI port interface; connects a system to a Star Coupler. Cold start An attempt by the primary processor to boot a new copy of the operating system. Compact disk server Ethernet-based CD server; provides access to CDROMs for software installation, diagnostics, and on-line documentation. Console communications area (CCA) Segment of system main memory reserved by the console program. Console mode A mode of operation allowing a console terminal operator to communicate with nodes on the XMI bus. DEBNI VAXBI adapter; Ethernet port interface. DEMNA XMI adapter; Ethernet port interface. DHB32 VAXBI adapter communication device; supports up to 16 terminals. DMB32 VAXBI adapter interface for 8-channel asynchronous communications for terminals, one synchronous channel, and a parallel port for a line printer. DRB32 VAXBI adapter; parallel port. Glossary-2 DSB32 VAXBI adapter communication device; provides two synchronous lines. DWMBB The XMI-to-VAXBI adapter; a 2-module adapter that allows data transfer from the XMI to the VAXBI; DWMBB/A is the module in the XMI card cage, and DWMBB/B is the VAXBI module. Every VAXBI on a VAX 6000 series system must have a (XBI) adapter. Ethernet-based compact disk server The RRD40 compact disk drive, a console load device, functions as a server on the Ethernet. FV64A Vector processor; works in a scalar/vector processor pair. Interleaving memory See Memory interleaving. KDB50 VAXBI adapter for RAxx disks; enables connection to disk drives. KDM70 XMI adapter for RAxx disks; enables connection to disk drives. Memory interleaving Method to optimize memory access time; the VAX 6000 series console program automatically interleaves the memories in the system unless the SET MEMORY command is used to set a specific interleave or no interleave (which would result in serial access to each memory module). Interleaving causes a number of memories to operate in parallel. Memory node Also called the (XMA2). Memory is a global resource equally accessible by all processors on the (XMI). See also (XMA2). Module A single (XMI) or VAXBI card that is housed in a single slot in its respective card cage. XMI modules (11.02" x 9.18") are larger than VAXBI modules (8.0" x 9.18"). Glossary-3 Shadow set Two disks functioning as one disk, each shadowing the information contained on the other, controlled by an HSC controller under the VMS operating system. Symmetric multiprocessing A multiprocessing system configuration in which all processors have equal access to operating system code residing in shared memory and can perform all, or almost all, system tasks. System root In a BOOT commmand, the argument to the /R5 qualifier. TBK70 VAXBI adapter connecting the TK tape drive to the system. TU81E VAXBI adapter for a local (nonclustered) tape subsystem. The TU81E controller uses the KLESI-B adapter. VAX Diagnostic Supervisor (VAX/DS) Software that loads and runs diagnostic and utility programs. VAXBI bus The 32-bit bus used for I/O. VAXBI Corner The portion of a VAXBI module that connects to the backplane and provides an electrically identical interface for every VAXBI node. VMB The virtual memory boot program (VMB.EXE) that boots the operating system. VMB is the primary bootstrap program and is stored on the boot device. The goal of booting is to read VMB from the boot device and load the operating system. XBI Lines in the self-test display that show the status of (XBI_ plus) adapters and of VAXBI nodes. See also (xbi_plus). XMI The 64-bit, high-speed system bus. Glossary-5 (XMI) Corner The portion of an (XMI) module that connects to the backplane and provides an electrically identical interface for every XMI node. Glossary-6 Index ------------------------------------------------------------ A ------------------------------------------------------------ Architecture, 1-4 with vector processors, 5-4 B ------------------------------------------------------------ Backup cache KA64A processor, 4-7 Booting control flags for, D-1 to D-2 Boot processor how to replace, 3-44 how to replace KA64A, 4-50 KA62B processor, 3-10 KA64A processor, 4-10 BPD in self-test display, 3-17, 4-19, 5-11 C ------------------------------------------------------------ Configuration rules KA62B processor, 3-4 KA64A processor, 4-4 memory, 6-4 processor, 5-6 (xbi_plus) adapter, 7-6 to 7-7 Console commands KA62B processor, 3-38 KA64A processor, 4-40 SET MEMORY command, 6-13, 6-15 SHOW MEMORY command, 6-13, 6-15 vector processor, 5-18 CPU replacement multiprocessor system CPU replacement multiprocessor system (Cont.) KA62B, 3-44 to 3-47 KA64A, 4-50 to 4-53 single processor KA62B, 3-40 to 3-43 KA64A, 4-46 to 4-49 D ------------------------------------------------------------ DEBNI, running RBD, 2-28 Diagnostics design, 2-2 KA62B ROM-based, 3-24 KA64A ROM-based, 4-28 overview, 2-2 to 2-3 ROM-based, 2-2 self-test, 2-2 VAX/DS, 2-2, 5-16 XGPR use, 4-24, 5-12 DWMBB adapter, 7-1 to 7-16 configuration rules, 7-6 to 7-7 functional description, 7-8 to 7-9 physical description, 7-2 to 7-3 RBD, 7-10 registers, 7-14 to 7-16 specifications, 7-4 to 7-5 E ------------------------------------------------------------ EEPROM version number KA62B processor, 3-9 KA64A processor, 4-9 Error messages console Model 300, A-1 to A-10 Model 400, B-1 to B-11 Index-1 ETF in self-test display, 3-17, 4-19, 5-11 EVUCA session on KA62B, 3-50 to 3-53 on KA64A, 4-56 to 4-59 Extended test KA62B processor, 3-13 KA64A processor, 4-14 F ------------------------------------------------------------ FV64A processor inserting in XMI card cage, 5-25 I ------------------------------------------------------------ I/O nodes, 1-5 Interleaving, 6-10 console commands, 6-12 default, 6-11 K ------------------------------------------------------------ KA62B processor configuration rules, 3-4 console commands, 3-38 CPU replacement multiprocessor system, 3-44 to 3-47 single processor system, 3-40 to 3-43 functional description, 3-6 how to add new, 3-48 how to replace boot, 3-44 how to replace only using RESTORE, 3-40 how to replace only using SET, 3-42 how to replace secondary, 3-48 LEDs, 3-18 machine checks, 3-36 patching EEPROM with EVUCA, 3-50 physical description, 3-2 power-up, 3-12 KA62B processor (Cont.) primary cache, 3-7 processor chip (CVAX), 3-7 RBD CPU/memory test, 3-30 second-level cache test, 3-32 self-test, 3-26 registers, 3-54 to 3-58 second-level cache, 3-7 self-test, 3-13 self-test display, 3-16 VAX/DS diagnostics, 3-34 XMI interface, 3-7 KA64A processor backup cache, 4-7 configuration rules, 4-4 console commands, 4-40 CPU replacement multiprocessor system, 4-50 to 4-53 single processor system, 4-46 to 4-49 functional description, 4-6 how to add new, 4-54 how to replace boot, 4-50 how to replace only using RESTORE, 4-46 how to replace only using SET, 4-48 how to replace secondary, 4-54 LEDs, 4-20 machine checks, 4-38 patching EEPROM with EVUCA, 4-56 physical description, 4-2 power-up, 4-12 primary cache, 4-7 processor chip, 4-7 RBD CPU/memory test, 4-34 self-test, 4-30 registers, 4-60 to 4-65 self-test, 4-14 self-test display, 4-18 specifications, 4-3 Index-2 KA64A processor (Cont.) VAX/DS diagnostics, 4-36 XMI interface, 4-7 L ------------------------------------------------------------ LEDs KA62B processor error code in, 3-18 KA64A processor error code in, 4-20 M ------------------------------------------------------------ Machine checks, 5-17 KA62B processor, 3-36 KA64A processor, 4-38 Memory See MS65A memory Module handling, 4-42 to 4-45, 5-22 to 5-25 MS62A memory RBD test examples, 6-22 MS65A memory addressing, 6-14 configuration rules, 6-4 control and status registers, 6-24 description, 6-2 features, 6-3 functional description, 6-6 good and bad memory pages, 6-19 interleaving, 6-10 mixed memory usage, 6-26 power-up, 6-16 RBD test 3, 6-20 parameters, 6-21 self-test, 6-16 to 6-19 self-test errors, 6-18 to 6-19 specifications, 6-5 yellow LED, 6-19 MTPR/MFPR instructions, 4-63, 5-29 MTVP/MFVP instructions, 5-29 P ------------------------------------------------------------ Power identification determined by inspection, 1-3 determined remotely, 1-6 to 1-7 Power-up KA62B processor, 3-12 KA64A processor, 4-12 Primary processor See Boot processor Processor configuration rules, 5-6 console commands, 5-18 machine checks, 5-17 Progress trace, 2-5, 4-18, 5-10 R ------------------------------------------------------------ RBDs See also ROM-based diagnostics on VAXBI devices, 2-28 (XBI_plus) adapter, 1-5 (XMA2) memory, 1-5 (XMI)-to-VAXBI adapter, 1-5 See also DWMBB adapter (XRP) module handling procedures, 4-42 to 4-45 inserting in XMI card cage, 4-44 to 4-45 (XRP) processor, 4-1 to 4-65 See also Scalar processor (xrv) processor how to replace, 5-26 (XRV) processor, 5-1 to 5-29 See also Vector processor (XYP) processor, 3-1 to 3-58 See also Scalar processor Registers Index-3 Registers (Cont.) DWMBB adapter, 7-14 KA62B processor, 3-54 to 3-58 KA64A processor, 4-60 to 4-65 MS65A memory, 6-24 to 6-25 (xbi_plus) adapter, 7-14 to 7-16 vector processor, 5-28 to 5-29 Repair tag, 4-45 ROM-based diagnostics commands, 2-8 QUIT, 2-19 START, 2-14 to 2-17 SUMMARY, 2-22 to 2-23 control characters, 2-8 to 2-9 entering RBD mode, 2-9 exiting RBD mode, 2-12 fatal error, defined, 2-16 hard error, defined, 2-16 KA62B CPU/memory test, 3-30 KA62B second-level cache test, 3-32 KA62B self-test, 3-26 KA64A CPU/memory interaction tests, 4-34 KA64A self-test, 4-30 MS65A memory, 6-20 on KA62B, 3-24 to 3-32 on KA64A, 4-28 to 4-35 overview, 2-2 program, 2-8 to 2-12 qualifiers, 2-15 to 2-17 (xbi_plus) adapter, 7-10 to 7-13 sample session, 2-24 to 2-27 self-test, 5-14 soft error, defined, 2-16 system reset in, 2-19 test printout explanation, 2-18 to 2-21 failing, 2-20 to 2-21 passing, 2-18 to 2-19 sample, 2-24 to 2-27 tests, 2-10 VAXBI devices, 2-28 to 2-29 ROM requirements for vector processors, 5-4 ROM version number KA62B processor, 3-9 KA64A processor, 4-9 RSSC, 4-9 S ------------------------------------------------------------ Scalar processor, 1-5 KA62B specifications, 3-3 (XRP), 4-1 to 4-65 (xyp), 3-1 to 3-58 Self-test, 2-4 to 2-6 display, 5-10 KA62B display, 3-13, 3-16 KA62B processor, 3-13 KA64A display, 4-14, 4-18 KA64A processor, 4-14 progress trace, 2-5 sample printout, 2-4 when invoked, 2-5 Specifications DWMBB adapter, 7-4 to 7-5 KA62B processor, 3-3 KA64A processor, 4-3 MS65A memory, 6-5 vector processor, 5-5 SSC, 3-9 STF in self-test display, 3-17, 4-19, 5-11 System architecture, 1-4, 5-4 functional description, 1-4 to 1-5 System support chip See RSSC for KA64A See SSC for KA62B T ------------------------------------------------------------ TBK70, running RBD, 2-28 Index-4 Troubleshooting flowcharts, 1-8 to 1-10 TYP in self-test display, 3-17, 4-19, 5-11 U ------------------------------------------------------------ ULTRIX booting, D-2 V ------------------------------------------------------------ VAX/DS, 2-30 to 2-47 booting from Ethernet, 2-32 to 2-33 description, 2-31 diagnostics, 5-16 documentation, 2-30 exerciser tests, 2-31 explanation of levels, 2-30 function tests, 2-31 HELP in, 2-31 interrupt, 2-39, 2-41 KA62B diagnostics, 3-34 KA64A diagnostics, 4-36 list of diagnostics, 2-42 to 2-47 logic tests, 2-31 running in user mode, 2-34 to 2-35 running standalone, 2-34 to 2-35 sample session, 2-36 to 2-41 trap, unexpected, 2-39 types of diagnostic programs, 2-31 unexpected trap, 2-39 VAX Diagnostic Supervisor See VAX/DS Vector console commands, 5-18 Vector processor configuration rules, 5-6 console commands, 5-18 functional description, 5-8 handling procedures, 5-22 to 5-25 how to replace, 5-26 Vector processor (Cont.) machine checks, 5-17 memory requirements, 5-5 physical description, 5-2 to 5-3 registers, 5-28 to 5-29 self-test, 5-10 specifications, 5-5 XMI transactions, 5-9 VMS booting, D-1 X ------------------------------------------------------------ XGPR register, 4-24, 5-12 XMI interface KA62B processor, 3-7 KA64A processor, 4-7 Index-5